#'^i
-it.
'<i\
■^Vl ■^•XEKCISES
VV/.lU
EDITION
^^^5^3
Class
Rnnk ./\ g g
^4-4--
SELECT
LIST OF SCHOOL BOOKS
PUBLISHED BY
SIMPKIN, MARSHALL, & Co.
Allison's First Lessons in English Grammar. 18mo. 9d.
Allison's Child's French Friend. 18mo. 2s.
Allison's La Petite Fran^aise : Vocabulary, &c. 18mo. 2s.
Arnold's Henry's First Latin Book. 1 2mo. 3s.
Baldwin's History of England. 12mo. 3s. 6d.
Baldwin's Outlines of English History. 18mo. Is.
Bellenger's French and English Conversation. 1 2mo. 2s. 6d.
Binns' Exercises in False English. 12mo. Is. 6d.
Bland's Latin Hexameters and Pentameters. 12mo. 3s.
Bond's View of Ancient Geography, an Introduction to Butler's
Ancient Geography. Oblong, 7 Maps, 2 Parts. 4s. 6d.
Bos worth's Introduction to Latin Construing. 12mo. 2s. 6d.
Bos worth's Latin Construing. 12rao. 2s. 6d.
Bosworth'sEtonGreekGrammar,withEng. Notes. 12mo. 4s.
Bosworth's Compendious Grammar of the Primitive English
or Anglo-Saxon Language. 8vo. 5s.
Bruce's Geography and Astronomy. 12mo. 6s.
Butler's Questions in Eoman History. 12mo. 5s. 6d.
Butler's Geography of the Globe, by Rowbotham. 1 2mo 4s. 6d.
Carey's Latin Versification Simplified. 15mo. 2s.
Caesar de Bello Gallico. J. Christison. 12 mo. 4s.
Caasar's Commentaries, translated by Duncan. I2mo. 7s.
Chambaud's Fables Choisies, par Wells. I8mo. 2s.
Ciceronis de Officiis LibriTres. G.Ferguson. 18mo. Is. Gd.
Cobbin's Grammatical and Pronouncing Spelling-Book.
12mo. Is. 6d.
Cobbin's Classical English Vocabulary. 12mo. 3s.
Cobbin's Instructive Reader, wath Cuts. 12mo. 3s.
Crabb's English Synonymes Explained. 8v.). 15s.
Crombie's Etymology and Syntax. 8vo. 7s. 6d.
Crombie's Gymnasium, sive Symbola Critica. 12mo. Gs.
Cowie's Questions on Ditto. 12mo. 2s. Gd.
Crombie's Gymnasium, enlarged, 2 vols, 8vo. 21s.
Crombie's Clavis Gymnasii. 8vo. 6s.
Douville's Speaking French Grammar. Crown 8vo. 7s. Gd.
Edward's Accented Eton Latin Grammar. 12mo. 2s. Gd.
Edward's Eton Latin Accidence. 12mo. Is.
Edward's Latin Delectus. 12mo. 2s. 6d.
Edward's Sententise Selectse. 12mo. 2s. 6d.
Irv
.X3^X;*
Simpkin, Marshall, and Go's Select List of Scbool Boot^
Edwards' Exempla Graeca Minora. 12mo. 2s. 6d.
Edwards' Greek Delectus. 12mo. 3s. 6d.
j Edwards' Odes of Anacreon ; literally translated. 12mo. 6s.
Euripides' Medea, Phoenissae, Hecuba, and Orestes, Porson's
Text, with literal Ti'anslation into English Prose, and
Index to the Medea, by T. W. C. Edwards, M.A. 8vo,
£l; or, separately, 5s. each.
By the same Author, and on the same plan, 8vo. 5s. each.
1. The Prometheus Chained ofiEscliylus,Blomtield's Text.
2. The Antigone of Sophocles, Bruuck's Text.
3. The Philoctetes of Sophocles, Brunck's Text.
4. The Alcestis of Euripides, Monk's Text.
5. The QEdipus Rex of Sophocles, Brunck's Text.
Grandineau's Gramrnaire Royale. 8vo. 7s.
Greig's Young Ladies' Arithmetic. 12mo. 2s.
Hassell's Camera, or ArtofDrawingin Water Colours. 8vo- 5s.
Hewlett's (Mrs) Modern Speaker. 18mo. 4s.
Hodgkiti's Sketch of the Greek Accidence. 8vo. 2s. 6d.
Hook's Key to the Greek Testament. 12mo. 3s. 6d.
Jacobs' Latin Reader. 12mo. Part 1, 2s. 6d. ; Part 2, 38.
Jordan's German Writing Copies. Oblong. Is. 6d.
T\Juigne's Table of French Verbs. On a large sheet. 3s.
^^e Nouveau Testament, large print. 12mo. 4s.
Mair's Introduction to Latin Syntax. 12mo. 3s.
Mair's Tyro's Latin Dictionary. 12mo. 7s.
Martinelli's Italian and French Dictionary. Small 8vo. 10s. 6d.
Phaedrus, Latin Text. 18mo. Is. 6d.
Phsedrus, Construed, for Grammar Schools. 12mo. 3s.
j Schrevelius' Greek and English Lexicon (Valpy's). 8vo. 15s
Tayler's Eton Greek Grammar, literally translated into
English. 12mo. 4s.
Taylor's System of Stenography, fcp. 3s.
Trimmer's History of England, by Milner. fcp. 5s.
Virgil's Bucolics, Heyne's Text, with literal Translation into
English Prose, by T.W. C.Edwards, M.A. Lnp. 8vo. 8s.
White's (Rev. J.) Tutor's Expeditious Assistant 12mo. 2s.
White's Elucidation of Ditto. 12mo. 4s. 6d.
White's Mental Arithmetic. 12mo. 3s. 6d.
Wilcke's Method of acqui ring French and Italian Pr-
nunciation. 12mo. 2s.
Yeates' Hebrew Grammar, by Bialloblotzky. Royal 8vo. 5s.
Zotti's Table of Italian Verbs, by C. Bruno. On sheet. 3s.
S., M., & Go's CorPLETE Schooi> Catalogue may be had gratis.
J. Wertheimer <k Co,, Printers, Circus Place. London Wall.
<^X^X^X^X3^X^X3^X^X^X3^X^X:^X^X^>-
^X^X^X^X^X^X^X}^X^X^X^X^X^X}^X:^
:v*'i?iV",y'i'V''i&*v'fc«i"V'iJi'V*i&'\^^^^
K^X^X^X}^X^X^X^X^Xi^Xi^X;^/^^/\;^/^;^/s.
^X^X^X^X^X^X^X}^X^X3^X^X^X^X^X^.
<^X^X^X^X!^X}^X^X^X^X3^X^X^X^X^X,
^X^X^X}^X^X)^X^XMX3^X^X^X^X^X^X^!
<'^X^X^X^X^X'^XMX^XMX^X^X^X^X^X
■^XMX3^X^X^X3^X}^X]^X}^X^X!^X^X^X¥X^
<^x^x^x}^x^x^x^x3^x¥x¥x]
^x^x^x3^x^x^x^x^x^x^x^!
x}^xmx^x^x^x}^x}^xmx3^xmx^x^x^x3^x:
ck^x^x^x^x}^x^x^x3^xi^x^x^x^x¥xm!
x^x^x3^x]^x3^x}^x!^x}^x3^x)^x!^x^x^x^x^
mX^XMX}^X3^XMX^X3^X^X3^XJ^X3^X!^X^X^!
x^xmx3^x^x^x^x!^x!^x3^x}^x^x!^x}^x}^x!
!}^x}^x!^xj^x3^x^xj^x!^x^x!^x1^x]^x^x^xs^!
^x!^x^x!^x!^x;^x}^x}^x3^x^x3^x}^x3^x^x^!
X^X^X3^X!^Xi^X}^X}^X}^X3^X}^X}^X^X^X^X!
^X^X^X?^X^X!^X!^X
)O^X}^X}^X!^X}^Xi^X}^X^X}^X!^Xi^X3^X^X^X!
'KXMX^X^X}^XJ*:X}^X!^X]^X}^XJJ^X!^X3^X^X}^!
'X^XMX}^X^X^X}^X^X^X^X^X!^X)8^X!^X}^X!
X3^X^X3^X3^X!^X}^X}^X}^X}^Xi^X^XJ^X^X3^X!
J^X^X^X^^XJ^X^^X-^XJ^X^X^X^X^X^X^X^]
X^X^X}^X}^X}^X3^X}^X}^X5^X5^X}^X5^X^X^X1
^x^x}^x}^x^x}^x;^x;^xi^x^x}^x^x^x¥X^]
X5^X3^X^X^X}^X)J^X}^X}^X^X^XJi^X!^X3^X^X:
}^X!^X^X^X^X}^X!^X!^X!^X}^X3^X}^X!^X^X^]
::• ^Z*^? '•••^\' v'*^' •"•^••- '^^
lAl i^*il %v* ^t^ \y* Ixtjl ••-.•' ^fjl *••■•* ^t^ '•..•' ^♦'i' '% .'' 'itlsl' \y' I^il* '•• ••'* i;ti *•• •• ^^^ *•••*' Bt^il *'•.'*' i^^ **•.•'* la-'il ••-•**' ^■:L '••*••*' <
,.?(P,.%^._y\.?«'*..'\_*%?^ ..••., y**?^^.-',. %? ..••.. %^ ..••.. %? ..-•., ?J? ..••,. %?,..•% ?«?..••*•. ^«? .••"'. ?«?,.••••• ?«?..••••, ?«? .••*•. I
.•^...' \.^^...' \.?i?. .••'•. .?«?. ••••.. y^, .•••'. %■'? .••'•. ?»? •••••- %'^. .••••• ?*^ ••"•. ,%?. ••• '. ?»^ .••••• ?*?. .••'-. .?«^. .••••. S? .••••• ?«? i
'^X}^X}^X^X^XJ^X}^X^X}^X^X^Xi^X}^XJ^X^>
X^X^X^X!^X^X3^X}^X!^X3^XMX}^X!^X3^X^X}
^X}^X}^X^X3^X!^X^X^X^X^X}^X!^XJ^X^X!^^
«,
■'■■^f"'
DR. ALLEN'S
CONSTRUCTIVE EXERCISES,
Sfc.
DR. ALLEN'S
CONSTRUCTIVE EXEECISES
TEACHING GREEK
FROM THE COMMENCEMENT BY WRITING.
SBCOKTD EDZTZOir,
REVISED AND CONSIDERABLY ENLARGED.
BY
JOHN ROBSON, B.A., Lond.
MEMBER OF THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY, AND ASSISTANT MASTER
IN UNIVERSITY COLLEGE SCHOOL.
LONDON:
PRINTED FOR TAYLOR AND WALTON,
BOOKSELLERS AND PUBLISHERS TO UNIVERSITY COLLEGE,
28, UPPER GOWER STREET.
1844.
Printed by J. & H. Cox, Brothers (late Cox & Sons),
74 & 75, Great Queen-street, Lincoln's-Inn Fields.
PREFACE,
The following work was originally composed on
the principle that inflexions may be more easily
committed to memory through the medium of
writing exercises, than by reading over lists of
forms in the pages of a grammar ; especially when
the terminations are exhibited apart from the root
to which they are affixed, and made the subjects
of distinct rules. By these means the pupil is
trained to some degree of generalization, a process
very much more agreeable to most minds than
the tedious drudgery of learning by rote lists of
words, and the results of which are far more
readily retained in the memory. Besides, on this
plan each suffix is taken separately, its meaning
is fully explained, and abundant practice in its use
is afforded ; whereas on the common system, the
learner is presented with a great variety of suf-
fixes all together, and their significations are very
imperfectly explained : the consequences are, that
one termination is confounded with another, and
no clear notion is obtained of their respective
h
VI PREFACE.
meanings. It may even be doubted whether the
majority of boys ever think of separating the root
from the suffix : each case or person is looked
upon as an indivisible vi^hole, the meaning of
which must be learned by itself; and as this is to
be done with many hundred inflexions, it is no
wonder that boys generally make so little pro-
gress either in Latin or Greek. Without gene-
ralization, the result of analysis and comparison,
it is vain to expect that a knowledge of any lan-
guage can be acquired ; and this process must be
performed by each student for himself — under
the guidance and with the assistance of others,
doubtless — but still consciously and intelligently,
not as a mere repeater of rules laid down by
others.
It is obvious that another very important ad-
vantage to be derived from using such a work
as the present is, that while the pupil is learning
the accidence he is at the same time acquiring a
stock of words, which will prove of the greatest
service when he commences reading the Greek
authors : the principal difficulty at this time ordi-
narily is, that all the words being unknown, not
only is the labour of looking for them in the
lexicon very great and discouraging, but as no
general notion can be formed of the meaning
PREFACE. Vll
of any given sentence previously to using the
lexicon, the pupil has nothing to guide him
in the selection of the signification borne by
any word in the given instance from among the
various meanings probably assigned to it in the
lexicon. Whereas if several of the words were
known to him, the labour of translating would be
diminished in the two ways just indicated, and
the task would become comparatively pleasurable.
In the course of this work, upwards of 1,500 Greek
words will have to be used, most of them repeat-
edly ; and they are generally words of common
occurrence ; so that any one who shall write the
whole of the exercises will afterwards find but little
difficulty in translating a simple Greek book,
especially Xenophon's Anabasis, a considerable
number of the sentences being taken from that
work. In University College School the plan of
teaching Greek is to begin with this book, and
then to read the Anabasis, using Mr. Hardy's
lexicon to the first six chapters: it has been
found that after this few boys experience much
trouble in mastering the Anabasis, when left to
translate it with the aid of an ordinary lexicon.
This work is written on what is called the
Crude Form system : that is, the Greek words in
the vocabulary are not given in any case or
VIU PREFACE.
person, but in their simple uninflected stat{3, which
is their " Crude Form." The advantages of this
plan over the old one of taking the nominative
singular of nouns and the first person singular
present indicative of verbs, as the forms from
which the others are derived, are so obvious that
it is really surprising that it has not spread more
rapidly in this country. It is the only plan on
which the analytical mode of teaching Greek or
Latin can be founded ; it greatly simplifies the
rules of inflexion ; it avoids the false and arbitrary
notion of deriving one case or tense, &c., from
another ; it renders easy the explanation of many
apparent anomalies and irregularities; and finally,
is of the greatest value in shewing the connection
and derivation of words, not only of Greek words
with and from other Greek words, but also of
English derivatives from the Greek.
It has been objected to the Crude Form
system that it is " arbitrary." Of all objections
this is the least applicable to it. Those who
make it seem to suppose that a particular form is
invented and called the crude form or root, merely
because it happens to be a convenient one from
which to derive the cases and tenses : now it is
quite true that, as a general rule, the various in-
flexions are easily made from the Crude Form ;
PREFACE. IX
this is a proof of the correctness and advantage
of the system ; but the process by which the^
Crude Form is found is very different from that "^ _
of " mvention : it consists in a comparison oi all; ^^
the words of common origin, for the purpose, if /^^ ^
possible, of finding the root freed from any com-l-^
bination which might occasion a change in itsl
original form, and that is called the Crude Forniy
Thus to determine the Crude Form of jSXaTrrw —
which, a priori, may be either j3Xa7r, j3Xaj3, or
/3Xa(^ — it is of no use to refer to the future f3Xa\p(jj,
to the perfect active f3£J3Xa(l>af to the perfect
passive fi^piXanfiai, or to the first aorist passive
£fd\a(j)Oriv ; since in all these words certain suffixes
are added to the root which necessitate various
changes in it, and these changes would be the
same whether the root ended in tt, |3, or 0. But
the second aorist passive, tjSXa/Brjv, has a suffix
which begins with a vowel, so that no change in
the root is required ; manifestly, then, the root is
j3Xa/3. This conclusion is confirmed by com-
paring cognate words, j3Xaj3-a ' hurt,' j3Xa/3-£/oo
' hurtful,' a-j3Xaj3-£c * harmless,' &c. &:c.
However inapplicable the term *' arbitrary "
may be to the Crude Form plan, it is undoubtedly
true enough of the old one, which consisted in
selecting some particular case or person, and by
b 2
X PREFACE.
various complicated rules, manufacturing from
them other cases, persons, and tenses. No-
thing can, at the same time, be more absurd
than some of these ingenious contrivances. Thus
in the Port Royal Greek Grammar (Nugent's
Translation, Rule LXIII.) we are told that " the
paulo'post future passive is formed from the 2nd
person singular of the perfect by inserting oju be-
fore m; ^^jTiTVfXfxai, rervxpat, Terv-ipofim"! There
the rule stops : so important in the eyes of the
old grammarians was the first person singular,
that they were content with giving rules for its
formation — the other five persons took their
chance, or were to be learned from the " example."
Similarly with the nouns : the nominative sin-
gular is in reality the worst case that could have
been chosen as that from which to form the
others ; because the suffix of that case generally
being f, whenever the Crude Form ends in a
consonant the g causes that consonant to be
changed, so as to obscure the real root ; and even
where g is not added, the Crude Form almost
always undergoes some change in this case :
whereas the other cases generally contain the
root in its proper form. How can a pupil
know that the genitive singular of Kopa^ is
KO/QOfc-oc, of Of?, aiy-oQ, and of j3i??, j^rjx-oc^
PREFACE. XI
The nominative singular, in all three instances,
ends in 5, and there is nothing whatever to guide
him in forming the other cases from it. But if
the Crude Forms, KopaK, aiy, and jSrjx, were given,
he could easily derive from them every one of the
cases, the nom. sing, included; for he would have
learned, as a universal rule of the language, that
KQf jQj and ^c are all written and pronounced ?.
Illustrations of this kind might be multiplied ad
infinitum were they necessary.
Some persons may object to using any school
book written on the Crude Form system, on the
ground that there are no Greek grammars nor
lexicons in our language composed on that plan ;
but this difficulty may be ea&ily got over. All that
is necessary to enable the pupil to use books of
both sorts is, to point out that nouns, &c. whose
Crude Forms end in a, correspond to the first
declension of the grammars ; those ending in o to
the second ; and that all others belong to the
third : that verbs ending in a, e, and o are the
Contract verbs of the grammars; and that those
ending in any consonant, l or v, are the Barytone
verbs. This short and simple explanation is suffi-
cient to shew the connection between the two
systems, and to enable the scholar to convert
the terms of the one into those of the other.
Xll PREFACE.
These exercises are called constructive,* in refer-
ence to the application of the synthetical prin-
ciple to the formation of words, as well as of sen-
tences. The word writing is used in the title-
page in the sense of making sentences, as well as
of committing them to paper.
Having thus explained the general principles
on which the work was originally composed, and
which have been carefully retained in the present
edition, it remains to state the changes introduced
into it.
The principal of these is the addition of rules
and exercises on the Contract verbs, and on the
subjunctive, optative, and imperative moods ;
which were altogether omitted in the first edition.
It was thouoht that as the book is intended to
o
be an introduction to the reading of the Greek
authors, it could not be considered as effecting
its object while forms of such constant occur-
rence were omitted from it. In the exercises on
the added moods, care has been taken not to
introduce any sentences but those of the simplest
kind, and in respect to which no doubt could
exist as to the proper form to be used. Such
brief remarks on the syntax as appeared needful
have in all cases been given, either as parts of the
rules, or in notes on the exercises. An index of
PREFACE. Xlll
these remarks will be found at the end of the
work. This book now contains, in systematic
order, a complete set of exercises on every part of
the Greek verb ; and it is the only book in the
language which does so.
The term " optative '' has been retained solely
in deference to established usage, all our gram-
mars making use of it, so that to omit it might
cause considerable difficulty to those who may
wish to use a grammar in conjunction with the
exercise-book. There can be no doubt, however,
that the more correct and simple method is to
class the tenses of the subjunctive and optative
together under the former name ; the form of the
optative tenses and their syntax prove clearly
that they are nothing but the past tenses of the
subjunctive.
In another matter of nomenclature, however, the
present edition differs from ordinary practice, and
from the former edition : the names of the tenses
have been made descriptive of their real meaning :
thus, instead of " pluperfect " the tense is called
"past perfect," instead of "imperfect" the term
" past imperfect " is used. It is believed that
the classification into imperfect, perfect, and in-
definite, will be found much more distinct and
natural than that in common use ; which in some
XIV PREFACE.
respects is positively erroneous : thus, .what are
called the present infinitive and present participle,
are frequently past in signification; or, at least, are
to be translated by past forms in English : their
proper designation is *' imperfect."
Another improvement is the more systematic
and complete explanation of many things which
were either only partially explained in the first
edition, or in a desultory, detached manner : for
instance, the rules relating to the augment and
reduplication and to the euphonic changes, are
now given complete in their proper places, and
are not scattered in various parts of the book, nor
appended to particular words, which was one of
the greatest defects of the previous edition.
Without departing too far from the principle of
constant repetition, a much greater variety of
words has been introduced into the exercises ; so
that there are fully twice as many Greek words in
this as there were in the first edition. Most of
the exercises also, especially in the former part of
the book, have been considerably shortened.
An appendix has been added, containing
some irregular nouns, a synopsis of the Greek
verb, and rules for the conjugation of verbs in /xt.
The synopsis should be frequently referred to in
the course of using the book for the purpose of
PREFACE. XV
enabling the pupil to gain a general notion of the
inflexions ; which he can hardly be expected to do
from the study of the separate rules.
The remarks on the alphabet, explaining the
classification of the letters and the principles
which regulate their combinations, will be found
of considerable advantage to those who use the
book, and should be carefully studied.
The rules have throughout been corrected, and
in many cases wholly re-written : for instance,
those on the dual number of verbs.
Lastly, the vocabularies, instead of being given
under each exercise, are now placed all together at
the end, in the alphabetical order of the English
words. Several reasons may be given in favour
of this change : first, a great saving of space is
thus effected ; secondly, the words may be more
readily found ; and lastly, the various derivatives
from the same root are frequently brought toge-
ther, and their connection shewn. The quantity
of the doubtful syllables in the Greek has been
marked in the vocabulary.
The Editor may be permitted to say that in
introducing these changes, he has done so with
the approval of Professor Maiden ; to whom he is
under deep obligations for his unwearied kindness
in revising the sheets ; every one of which owes
XVI PREFACE.
much to the numerous suggestions and emenda-
tions made by that gentleman : in fact, there is
scarcely a page in the book that has not been
improved by his observations. The Editor must
also express his thanks to Professor Key for
several valuable suggestions.
The following remarks on the mode of using the
book are necessary :
The scholar is supposed to be acquainted v^ith
the meaning of the terms of grammar used in
Latin and English, so that no explanation of them
is given in the book.
Before the scholar proceeds to translate any
given exercise, he should learn by heart the rules
and examples, and the Crude Forms of all the
words required in it ; and for this purpose it will
be found a useful plan to direct him to write out
the English words, and opposite to them the
Greek Crude Forms given in the vocabulary ;
paying particular attention to the remarks pre-
fixed to the vocabulary on the proper mode of
using it. He should afterwards be examined, viva
voce, upon all that is required for the translation
of the exercise ; and then proceed to use his know-
ledge accordingly ; first translating into Greek,
viva voce, and afterwards on paper. It will also
be advisable to require him to commit to memory
PREFACE. XVll
given portions of the vocabulary, commencing at
the beginning, and going regularly through it,
frequently returning to what has been previously
learned.
This book may be used by itself, and contains
all that is necessary to enable the pupil to trans-
late the exercises, without the aid of either
grammar or lexicon. Great pains have been
taken to make the vocabulary complete, and it is
hoped that few, if any omissions, will be found.
University College,
Octoher, 1844.
XIX
CONTENTS.
PAGE
Preface . . . . . , . . . . ... v
Alphabet , . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
Remarks on the Alphabet . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
EXERCISES.
I. Present Tense of ftr ' be,' First and Second Personal
Pronouns, and Nominative of Masculine and
Feminine Nouns in o . , . . . . . . 1
II. Nominative of the Masculine Article and Adjective .. 3
III. Nominative of Neuter Nouns in o, and of the Neuter
Article . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
IV. Past Imperfect of ttr . . 5
V. Nominative of Masculine Nouns in a . . . . 6
VI. Nominative of Feminine Nouns in a, and of the Femi-
nine Article . . . . . . . . . . 7
VII. Future of fff 9
VIII. Dative of Nouns in o, and of the Masculine and Neuter
Article 10
IX. Dative of Nouns in a, and of the Feminine Article . . 12
X. Genitive of Nouns in o, and of the Masculine and Neuter
Article . , . . . , . . 14
XI. Genitive of Masculine Nouns in a . . . . 1 G
XII. Genitive of Feminine Nouns in a, and of the Feminine
Article . . . . . . . . , . 17
General Remarks on the Verb , . . . . . 19
XX
CONTENTS.
ACTIVE VOICE,
TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.
XIII. Present Tense, Accusative of Nouns in o, and of the
Masculine and Neuter Article . . . . . . 20
XIV. Present of Verbs increased or strengthened .. 24
XV. Future Tense, Accusative of Nouns in a, and of the
Feminine Article, Vocative of Nouns in o and a 28
Connected View of the Inflexions of Nouns in a and o 32
XVI. Past Imperfect Tense ; the Augment ; Comparative
and Superlative of Adjectives . . . . . . 35
XVII. Second Aorist ; Consonant or Separable Declension 40
XVIII. First Aorist 47
XIX. Present Perfect ; Reduplication; NeuterNounsof the
Consonant Declension . . . . . . . . 51
XX. Past Perfect : Nouns in ev{eY) 56
THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS . . 59
XXI. Tenses of the Subjunctive .. .. .. ib.
XXII. Tenses of the Optative 64
XXIII. Tenses of the Imperative . . . . . . 70
XXIV. Infinitives 73
XXV. Participles 80
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE VOICE.
General Remarks
88
TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE,
XXVI. Present 90
XXVII. Future Imperfect 92
XXVIII. Futures Indefinite Passive 94
XXIX. Past Imperfect 97
XXX. Passive Aorists 100
XXXI. First Aorist Middle 103
XXXII. Second Aorist Middle 105
XXXTII. Present Perfect Passive and Middle ; the Com-
parative in toi^, and superlative in loro .. 106
CONTENTS.
XXI
XXXIV. Past Perfect, Passive and Middle
XXXV, Future Perfect, Passive and Middle
PAGE
112
115
THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE MOODS,
XXXVI. Tenses of the Subjunctive 117
XXXVII. Tenses of the Optative 122
XXXVIII. Tenses of the Imperative 130
XXXIX. Infinitives 135
XL. Participles 143
XLI. The Dual Number of Nouns, Adjectives, and Partici-
ples, and of the Active Verb , . . . . . 152
XLII. The Dual Number of the Passive and Middle Verb 157
APPENDIX.
I. Some Irregular Nouns and Adjectives declined .. .. 161
II. Sjmopsis of the Rules of Formation of the Greek Verb 162
III. Verbs in fii 168
IV. Regular Tenses of the Verbs in /xi 171
Vocabulary .. .. .. .. .. ..173
Index of the Rules of Syntax , . 195
G 2
XX 111
THE GREEK ALPHABET.
English
Numerical
Large.
Small.
Names.
Equivalents.
Values.
A
a
Alpha
a
1
B
^
Beta
b
2
r
7
Gamma
s
3
A
S
Delta
d
4
E
s
E-psilon
e
5
F
T
Digamma
f, or V, or w* 6
z
K
Zeta
z
7
H
n
Eta
e
8
e
9
Theta
th
9
I
I
Iota
i
10
K
K
Kappa
k, or hard
c 20
A
\
Lambda
1
30
M
H'
Mu
m
40
N
V
Nu
n
50
S
I
Xi
X
60
0-micron
5
70
n
TT
Pi
P
80
Q
9
Koppa
q*
90
p
p
Rho
r
100
s
(T
Sigma
s
200
T
T
Tau
t
300
Y
V
U-psilon
u
400
$
1>
Phi
ph, or f
500
X
X
Chi
ch hard
600
*
^
Psi
ps
700
Q
a»
0-mega
o
800
* These two letters were used by the most ancient Greeks, but
ceased to be written at an early period of the language. They are
XXIV REMARKS ON THE ALPHABET.
Although the Alphabet does not contain any
character representing the sound of our h, the
Greeks had that sound, and denoted it at the
beginning of words commencing with vowels by
the sign ( ' ). In other cases it combines with
the consonants, giving rise to the letters Q, 0,
and X-
Remark 1. The consonants are divided into
the following classes, to which frequent reference
will have to be made in the course of the follow-
ing exercises. The horizontal arrangement is
according to the part of the organ of voice chiefly
concerned in the production of the sounds, the
vertical according to the quality of the sounds.
MUTES.
Thin Medial Aspirated
(Tenues). (Mediae). (Aspiratae).
Labials tt /3 ^
Dentals r ^
Gutturals '^ 7 X
LIQUIDS, OR SEMI-VOWELS.
X, fx,v,p;
fjL, labial
V, dental
> sometimes called nasals.
inserted here because they continued to be used as numerical sym-
bols, and because one of them at least, the digamma, is of great
importance in the explanation of many forms of inflexion and
other phenomena in the language. The digamma is also called
vau or bau.
REMARKS ON THE ALPHABET. XXV
X and p are sometimes called semi-vowels, to
the exclusion of /u and v.
THE SIBILA.NT.
The only letter belonging to this class is a.
On account of the Uttle affinity between the
sound of which this is the representative, and
the other consonant sounds, many changes take
place in the form of words when o- comes imme-
diately after other consonants, o- is most nearly
connected with the semi-vowels, among which,
indeed, it is sometimes included.
DOUBLE CONSONANTS.
^ = (tS, 5 = ya, K(T or ^tr. \p = ttct, j3o- or ^o-.
The following are the principal rules which
regulate the combination of consonants.
1. Mutes of different classes (horizontal) can-
not stand together, except when the second mute
is a dental.
2. When Mutes of different classes come to-
gether (the second being a dental), they must be
of the same quality ; that is, thin must be joined
to thin, medial to medial, aspirated to aspirated.
To effect this, the first mute generally conforms
to the second ; being changed for another mute of
the same class as itself, but of the same quality
as the second mute. The aspirates can never be
doubled; and the doubling of the medials takes
XXVI REMARKS ON THE ALPHABET.
place only in particular contractions and old for-
mations, such as Ka(5j3aXe, sdSeKTE.
3. With the labials and gutturals or combines to
form \p and 5 ; before o- the dentals are omitted.
4. In verbal formations, before fx all the labials
become ju, the gutturals become 7, the dentals
become cr.
5. Before labials v becomes fx ; before gut-
turals, y in the written language, but retains its
proper sound ; before the liquids it is assimilated
to them ; before cr it is dropped.
Remark 2. The only consonants that can
stand at the end of a word are cr, v, pj and k ; the
last occurs at the end of two words only, €k and
ovKj which should always be read as part of the
word following. Since ^ and -tp are double con-
sonants, the final sound of which is that of <r,
they may, of course, stand at the end of words.
Remark 3. The sigma at the end of a word
is written in the form g : at the beginning or in
the middle of a word, a : so (Turrfiog,
Remark 4. y is the representative of two
distinct sounds, g and the guttural n. Before y,
Kj X and 5, n takes the form 7. So ayy^Xog,
cFvyKoir-n, Ayxi<^VQ> \apvy^, pronounced angelos,
sunkope, Anchises, larunx.
Remark 5. When used as numerals, the let-
ters have an accent above them, thus, a. The
numbers between the tens (e. g. 15, 59) are de-
noted by the sign of the tens followed by that of
REMARKS ON THE ALPHABET. XXVll
the units : thus 15 is tg, 59 is vO\ In the same
way are expressed the numbers between the hun-
dreds : thus, 478 is vor}\ The symbol for 900
was 11) (sampi). 1,000 was denoted by a, 2,000 by
^|3, and so on. This system of numeration, how-
ever, is comparatively modern, and was not em-
ployed by the classical Greek writers, who always
express the numerals at length.
Read.
AvXig, oivog. Ao\o\p. ^pvysg. H^w. Xapvy^.
A.y\La7]Q. Ar^fiOdOevrig. QovKvdidr}g. ^Hpo^orog.
So^okXtjc. Xapirsg. Biag, SoXwv. KvjOO^. Kpoi-
aog. KoXog. icir\vpog. rpij^w. iH^ep^rig. riyEjuiovLa.
avdpeg. '"^dojp. 'PoSo^. poda. ^aXafiig. Mapa-
6wv.
Write in Greek.
Olumpos. Homeros. Rhegion. Ilion. Sku-
thia. Naxos. Lakedaimon. Xanthippe. Titan.
Xanthos. Perikles. Lusias. Minos. Platon.
Aristophanes. Aischulos. Xenophon. Aischi-
nes. Euripides. Aineias. Strabon. Zeuxis.
Okeanos. Galatia.
GREEK EXEECISES.
I. — Present of ES "Be," First and Second
Personal Pronouns, and Nominative of
Masculine and Feminine Nouns in O.
Remark 1. The Crude Form of the verb to he
in Greek is tg. The inflections of this verb are
remarkable in Greek, as in many other languages,
for their departure from the usual rules of inflection.
to
H-juLL I am. £cr-jU£v we are.
£t-Q or EL thou art. ea-rs ye are.
£o--rt(v) he is. £l-<ti(v) they are.
£ig is the old form of the 2nd sing.; in the
Attic writers sl is used.
The V is added to cart and eiai when they
come before a vowel.
Remark 2. The personal pronouns also are
very irregular in their inflections, for which rea-
son the first and second are here given complete.
Singular.
Plural.
Singular.
Plural.
Norn
. eyio I.
r)fiug we.
(TV thou.
vfieig ye.
Gen.
ffiov or [lov of me.
rjfiwv of us.
(Tov of thee.
vfiiov of you.
Dat.
efioiOTfioi tome.
rjfiiv to us.
(Toi to thee.
vfi'iv to you.
Ace.
f/*£ or fie me.
Tifidg us.
B
ae thee.
vndg you.
-6 GREEK EXERCISES.
Remark 3. Nouns in o masc. and fern, are
made nom. in the sing, by c, and in the plur. by
I, added to the Crude Form.
Ewamples.
Masc. C.F. aSeXipo brother. N.S. adsXcpog. N.P. adeX^oi.
Fern. vT](ro island. vr](Tog. vrjffoi.
I^ am a man. Thou art a man. He is a man.
We are friends. Ye are friends. They are friends.
I am an Athenian. We are Athenians. Ye
are Athenians. I am a Lacedaemonian. Ye are
men. He is a barbarian. We are barbarians.
Ye are barbarians. He is a friend. Thou art an
ally. We are allies. He is an enemy to thee.
I am an Athenian and aYi ally. We are Athe-
nians and allies. They are Lacedaemonians and
enemies. He is a friend to us. They are friends
to you. Ye are friends to me. They are Corin-
thians and enemies. Theref is a road. There
are seven roads. Naxos is an island. Paros
* The distinction of person being sufficiently made by the ter-
minations of the verb, the nominative cases of the pronouns are
not used except when they are emphatic.
When the verb eg serves merely to connect the subject and pre-
dicate, as in most of the above sentences, it must be placed after
the predicate, that is, in these sentences, last : but when eg is used
as the substantive verb, being both copula and predicate, as in the
sentence, " There is a road," it should be placed ^rs^.
t In these and the following sentences, "There" and "It"
are not to be expressed in Greek.
GREEK EXERCISES.
and Delos are islands. There are seven beech-
trees. There is a beech-tree. It* is a disease.
There are diseases. They are virgins.
II. — Nominative of the Masculine Article
AND Adjective.
Remark 1. The Greek language has only one
article, which answers in meaning, and generally
in use, to the English definite article, " the."
Remark 2. The Crude Form of the masc. ar-
ticle is TO, To is declined like aSeX^o and all
nouns of that class, except in the nom. In the
nom. the r is softened into an aspirate. In the
sing. nom. the case-ending is not added : in the
plur. it is. Hence we have 6, not rog, in the
sing., and ot, not tol, in the plur.
Example.
N.S. 6 a^fX^oc the brother. N. P. ol a^cX^oi the brothers.
Adjectives in o are inflected like nouns.
C. F. ayaOo brave.
N. S. ayaOog aSeXfog. N. P. ayaOoi ade\<poi.
The Athenian is a friend to us. The Athenians
are friends to me. The general is a friend to
you. The Corinthians are enemies to thee. The
brother is a friend to us. The generals are brave.
The brother is brave. The generals are ready.
* See Note f on p. 2,
4 GREEK EXERCISES.
The allies are ready. We are ready. Ye are
brave. The brother is fearful. The generals and
captains are safe. The barbarians are ready.
The messengers are ready. The messenger is
faithful to us. The slave is faithful to you. The
brothers are friends to me. Thou art faithful to
me. We are faithful to thee. The captain is
brave. The captains are safe.
III. — Nominative of Neuter Nouns in O, and
OF the Neuter Article.
Remark 1. The nom. and ace. of all neuter
words are the same in form.
Remark 2. The nom. and ace. plur. of neuter
words always end in a, but the a sometimes
unites with another vowel to form rj.
Remark 3. Neuter nouns in o are made
nom., in the sing, by v, and in the plur. by a,
added to the Crude Form. In the plur. the o is
dropped : po^-a, not podo-a.
Example.
Neut. C. F. podo* a rose. N. S. poSov. N. P. poSa,
Remark 4. The Crude Form of the neuter
article is to. In the sing. nom. no case-ending
is added. It is made plur. in the same way as
the noun, by adding a to the Crude Form, and
dropping the o. Hence we have not ToUf but ra.
* p at the beginning of a word is always aspirated.
GREEK EXERCISES.
N. S. TO podov the rose. N. P. tu poSa the roses.
The adjective is inflected like the noun.
C. F. KoXo beautiful. N. S. KaXov podov. N. P. KoXa poca.
The rose is beautiful. The place is fortified.
The roses are beautiful.* The places are forti-
fied. The arms are ready. The eminence is
fortified. The prizes are ready. The bows are
ready. The bow is near. The sacrifices are
favourable. The gifts are beautiful. The supper
is ready. The beautiful children are ready. The
dinner is ready. The animals are ready. The
leaves are beautiful.
IV. — Past Imperfect of ES.
Remark. Read Rem. 1, under Exerc. I.
irv I was. fi-jLLEv we were.
^-GOaf or ^g thou wast. rj-Te ye were,
^-v he was. ri-aav they were.
I was a friend to thee. Thou wast a slave to
me. The general was a friend to us. We were
enemies to thee. Ye were enemies to us. The
* la Greek, plural neuter nominatives may be, and generally
are, joined to verbs in the singular, unless the notion of plurality
is to be made prominent, or the nominative is the name of a
person or living creature, in which cases the plural verb is often
used.
t ijcfQu is used in the earlier and better writers.
B 2
b GREEK EXERCISES.
messengers were faithful to us. We were ready.
The place was lofty. The eminence was fortified.
The apples were large. The garments were
beautiful. We were brave. The Corinthians
were cowardly. The messengers were cowardly.
The allies were fearful. Thou wast brave. Ye
were well-girt. The messenger was eager. The
animals were beautiful. The children were
ready.
V. — Nominative of Masculine Nouns in A.
Remark 1. Nouns in a masc. are made nom.
in the same way as nouns in o masc, by g in the
sing, and i in the plur. added to the Crude Form.
Remark 2. When the final a is preceded by
£, I, or p, the above is the only rule to be at-
tended to ; but if any other letter than one of
these precedes the a, the a is changed into ri in
all the cases of the singular, except the genitive
and, in some instances, the vocative.
In the plural the a is never changed.
Any deviation to be made from these rules will
be specially noted.
Examples.
Masc. C.F. vedvia young man. N.S. veaviag. N.P. veaviai.
TToXiTa citizen. ttoXittiq. TroXtrat.
With the article.
N.S. 6 veaviag. N.P. oi veaviai.
6 iroXiTrjQ. oi TroXirat.
GREEK EXERCISES. 7
I was a youth. Thou wast not a youth. We are
citizens. Ye were citizens. They were stewards.
I am a tax-gatherer. Cyrus was a satrap. We
were satraps. The traitors are cowardly. The
judge is brave. The youth was faithless. The
sailors are faithful. The islander was brave.
The heavy-armed men were supperless. The
soldiers and citizens were warlike. The captains
were safe. The citizen was well-girt. The
slinger was ready. The slingers are ready.
There were ten thousand bowmen. The bowman
was fearful. The shield-bearer is ready. ^Eneas
was faithful. The tax-gatherers were eager.
The stewards are near. Pythagoras was a philo-
sopher. The steward is a friend to me and to
thee.
VI. — Nominative of Feminine Nouns in A,
AND OF THE FeMININE ArTICLE.
Remark 1. Nouns in a fem. are made nom.
in the plur. in the same way as masc. nouns in a
and o, by i added to the Crude Form. In the
sing, the case-ending g is not added.
In addition to this, the following general rules
are to be observed.
1. Nouns in a preceded (1) by the vowel c or i,
or (2) by the semivowel p, retain the a of the
Crude Form all through the singular. See
ExERC. V. Rem. 2.
O GREEK EXERCISES.
2. In nouns in a preceded by XX, vv, o-c, ttj ?,
i(jy or ?, or by a after a diphthong or long vowel,
the a of the Crude Form passes into rj in the gen.
and dat. sing, only.* In the nom. sing, of these
nouns the a is short.
3. In other nouns in a fem. the a passes into r\
all through the singular.
4. In the plur. all these classes agree, the a
always remaining unchanged.
Any deviation to be made from these rules will
be specially noted.
Examples.
Fem. C.F. Ovpa door. N.S. Qvpd. N.P. 9vpai.
Tpaire^a table. rpairei^d. Tpa-m^ai.
Kojfia village. Kwfiri. KU)fiai.
Remark 2. The Crude Form of the fem. ar-
ticle is ra. The same rule applies in the fem. as
in the masc. to the r. The r is softened into
an aspirate; and the case -ending is not added in
the sing.
Ta is inflected with -q in the sing, according to
Rem. 1, Rule 3. Hence we have in the plur.
at, but in the sing. 17.
Examples.
N. S. Tj Qvpa the door. N. P. at Qvpai the doors.
ij rpaTTC^a the table. at TpainZ^ai the tables.
ri Kojfiri the village. al Kiofiai the villages.
* This rule applies to some nouns not comprised in any of the
above classes, but they need not be specified here, especially as
they cannot be included under any general rule.
GREEK EXERCISES. if
Remark 3. Adjectives are inflected in the
fem. according to Rules 1 and 3, in Rem. 1.
Rule 2 applies only to substantives.*
Examples.
C.F. KaXo. N. S. KaX og, ri, ov. N. P. koX oi, at, a.
diTTO. diTT og, r], ov. Sitt ot, at, a.
KTxvpo. to'xyp og, a, ov. i-<^X^P ^*> ^*> "•
The door is strong. There are seven doors.
The goddess is beautiful. The knife was long
and strong. The table is beautiful. The cherry-
tree is lofty. The village vv^as not large. The bride
was beautiful. The garrison was strong. There
were seven couches. The doors were strong.
The knives were beautiful. The villages were
large. The village is fortified. The shields were
gifts. The letter was sacred. It is evening. The
island was small. The road is not narrow. The
assembly is large. The diseases were violent.
The precious stone is large. The entrance is
narrow. The house was wooden. The bridges
were wooden. There was another conflict.
There are two (say, double) roads.
VII. — Future of ES.
Remark. Read Rem. 1, under Exerc. I.
* This last remark is confined to adjectives, the Crude Forms of
which in the masc. and neut. end in o.
10 GREEK EXERCISES.
ia-o^uL I shall be. ea-oji^da We shall be.
^a-rf or £o-ft thou wilt be. ecr-eaOe ye will be.
£CF'{s)Tat he will be. ia-ovrai they will be.
I shall be a brave soldier. Thou wilt be brave.
He will be cowardly. We shall be well-girt. Ye
will be eager. They will be supperless. The
messenger will be a friend to us. The Athenians
will not be eager allies. The citizens will be brave
sailors. The disease will be violent. The island-
ers will be safe. The road will be narrow. The
slaves will be ready. The generals and soldiers
will be bold. Thou wilt not be faithless to me.
We shall be fond of war. The place will be sacred.
The eminences will be fortified. The rose will
be beautiful. The sacrifices will be favourable.
The bows will be strong. The stewards will be
cowardly. I shall be a warlike satrap. Ye will
be tax-gatherers. The bride will be beautiful.
The doors will be lofty. The knives will be
long. The entrance will be narrow.
VIII. — Dative of Nouns in O, and of the
Masculine and Neuter Article.
Remark. Nouns in o are made dat. by t in
the sing., and ig in the plur., added to the Crude
Form. In the sing, the o is lengthened, becom-
GREEK EXERCISES. II
ing w, and the i is written under the w, not after
it. An I so placed is called iota subscript.
The dative of the masc. and neuter article, and
of adjectives in o, is made in the same way.
Masc. C.F. aM^o. D.S. a^f\0<fj. D.V. ah\(poig.
Fern. vr}(To. vt](T(^. vrjcFoig.
Neut. podo. podci). podoig.
With the Article.
Masc. D. S. r^ aSe\(p<{). D.P. toiq adeXtpoig.
Neut. T({j pod(i). ToiQ podoiQ.
The general will be in the tower. I shall be
in the field. Thou art in the boat. We shall be
in the boats. The Athenians were in the plain.
Ye will be in the garden. Cyrus is in the camp.
The Lacedaemonians will be with the strangers.
The satraps will be in the towers. I am with Cyrus
in the camp. Thou wast not in the crowd. The
boat will be in the river. The slinger will be
with the general in the expedition. The brother
was with the messenger in the crowd. The sis-
ters will be with the brothers on the eminences.
The friends were with me under the tree. The
corn is not in the garden. The boats and horses
are in the river. Th^ soldiers are in the boats.
Cyrus was brave in the war. Those* with Clear-
* Use the nom. plur. masc. of the article : the (persons) with
Clearchus.
12 GREEK EXERCISES.
chus were bold. The heavy-armed men are not in
the crowd. The (precious) stones are in the
palace. The beech -tree was in the park. The
lofty beech-trees are in the great park. The
beautiful virgins are with the farmers. The narrow
road is in (the) island. The fearful virgins were
in (the) sacred islands. The arms are in (the)
ditch. The bold messengers will be faithless to
thee and me. The warlike islanders were faithful
to us in the war.
IX. — Dative op Nouns in A, and of the
Feminine Article.
Remark. Nouns in a masc. and fem. are
made dat. in the same way as nouns in o, in the
sing, by i, and in the plur. by ig^ added to the
Crude Form.
In the sing, the t is subscript.
Read the Remarks in Exerc. V. and Exerc.
VI. again.
Ea^amples.
Masc. C, F. veavia. D. S. vf,aviq,. D. P. vsaviaiQ.
TToXiTa. iroXiry. TroXiTaig.
With the Article.
D. S. ry veavig.. D. P. toiq vtaviaig.
Ttfi TToXiry. TOIQ TToXiTaig.
I
GREEK EXERCISES. 13
Fern. C.F. Ovpa. B.S. 9vp(^. B.V. Ovpaig.
rpaTTtZa. rpuTre'Cy. rpaTrs^aig.
KWfxa. K(jj[xy. KWfiaig.
With the Article.
D. S. ry Qvpq,. D. P. raiq Ovpaig.
ry rpa-KiZ^y. raiQ Tpairt^aig.
Ty Kijjfiy. Taig KiOjiaig.
1.* The general is with the youth. The youth
will be with the steward. The stewards were
with the youths. The judge was with Pythagoras.
Pythagoras is not with the sailors in the house.
The bowman was with the shield-bearer in the
camp. The philosopher was with the citizen in
the park. Cyrus is a friend to the youth. Thou
wilt be friendly to the steward.
2. The rower was in the boat with the sailor.
Thou art an enemy to the Persian. I am friendly
to the soldier. We were not faithful to the satrap.
Cyrus was with the sailor and the traitor in the
boat. The general was with the bowman in the
camp.
3. Ten thousand camels are in the country.
The philosopher is in the porch. The just judges
are with the philosophers in the porches. The dis-
ciples were in the market-place. The soldiers
* The divisions in this exercise correspond to the various
classes of Crude Forms in a. 1 and 2 contain examples of mas-
culine nouns ; 3, 4, and 5, of feminine nouns.
C
14 GREEK EXERCISES.
were not present on the day. The barbarian will
be in the porch. There will be a noise in the as-
sembly.
4. The emerald and the sapphire are in the
sea. The disciple was in the conflict. The
snails were with the bees in the house. The bee
is on the tongue. The bees were on the thorn.
The snails are with the bees on the thorns.
5. The general is in the tent. The Athenians
are in the village. Ten thousand soldiers are
in the battle. A thousand soldiers were in the
garrison. The heavy-armed men were with the
bowmen in the flight. The unjust steward was
with the bride in the park. The youths were
not present with the brides in the conflict.
(I
X. — Genitive or Nouns in O, and of the
Masculine and Neuter Article.
Remark 1. The genitive plural of all words
in Greek ends in wv.
Remark 2. The genitive singular of nouns in
o is made by adding o, and the plur. by adding
wv, to the Crude Form.
In the singular oo is contracted into ou, and
in the plural the o of the Crude Form is dropped.
Hence we have not avOpojiroo, but avOpwirov,
— not av6pio7ro(jt)v, but avOpwirojv.
i
GREEK EXERCISES. 15
The genitive of the masc. and neut. article and
adjective is made in the same v^^ay.
Example.
Masc. C. F. avOpbJTTo. G. S. avOpioirov. G. P. avOpMirmp.
Fern. vt](TO. vrjaov. vriaittv,
Neut. po^o. poSov. po^iov.
With the Article.
Masc. G. S. Tov av9p(jJ7rov. G. P. tojv avQpcjTroJv.
Neut. TOV podov. riov poditjv.
The rest of the messengers* will be in the
middle of the camp of Cyrus. The house was
full of corn. The wild beasts were in the middle
of the river. The village is full of corn. The
chariots are full of wine. The slaves of the mes-
sengers are enemies to one another (plur.). The
rest of the warlike Corinthians were in the plain of
Castolus. The rest of the enemies' boats will be in
the sea. The boats are in the middle of the river.
The wise generals are outside the camp. The is-
landers were within the tower. The arms are
within the beautiful house. The bows are outside
the large park. The children were not in the camp
of the Athenians. The precious stones are not in
the house of the ally. The son of the faithless
* ** The rest of the messengers" is equivalent to *' the other
messengers," so that in this and the following sentences, *' rest
of" is to be translated by the adjective aXXo ; and the noun
coming after " rest of" will be in the nominative, not the geni-
tive.
16 GREEK EXERCISES.
barbarian will be in the plain. The animals will
not be in the field. The sacrifices are favourable
to the expedition of the Athenians. The victims
will not be favourable to the army of the fearful
Lacedaemonians. The dreadful wild beasts are in
the islands.
XI. — Genitive of Masculine Nouns in A.
Remark. The genitive of masc. nouns in a is
made in the same way as that of nouns in o, in
the sing, by o, and in the plur. by wv, added to
the Crude Form.
In the singular the ao becomes fo, which is
contracted into ov, and in the plural awv be-
comes £wv, which is contracted into wv. Hence
we have not veaviao, but veaviov ; not veaviawv,
but vtaviijjv.
Example.
Masc. C.F. veavia. G.S. viaviov. G. P. vtavi(i)V.
TToXlTa. TToXlTOV. TToKlTlilV.
With the Article.
G. S. Tov veaviov. G. P. ru)v veavKov.
TOV iroXtTOV. T(j)V TToXlTOJV.
The son of the citizen will be in the park. The
enemy of the steward will be in the assembly.
The sons of the tax-gatherer were in the market-
place. The valuable garment of the traitor is in the
tent. The roses and the girdles of the rowers were
GREEfK EXERCISES. 17
in the porch. iEneas was the son of Anchises.
The disciples of Pythagoras are in the house of
the master of the slave. The shields and letters
were on the table of the Persian. The long
knives were in the boat of the judge. The beau-
tiful roses will be in the chariots of the Persians.
The narrow road is through the garden of the citi-
zen. The wonderful fountain was in the garden of
the steward. The letters of the soldier and of the
bowmen are not in the house of the captain. The
bride was not in the country of the youth. The
girdle of the satrap is not in the tent. The arms
of the traitors will be in the village. Ten thou-
sand of the heavy-armed are in the plain. The
judges are in the assembly of the citizens.
XII. — Genitive of Feminine Nouns in A,
AND OF the Feminine Article.
Remark. The genitive of nouns in a is made in
the sing, bye, intheplur. by wv, added to the Crude
Form. In the plur. the a of the Crude Form
becomes £, and £wv is contracted into wv. Hence
we have not Ovpatov but Ovpojv.
The genitive of the fem. art. is made in the same
way.
Refer to the Rem. and rules in Exerc. V. as
to the change of a into ri.
c 2
18 GREEK EXERCISES.
Example.
Fem. C.F. Qvpa. G.S. Qvpaq. G.P. Qvptav.
KlOfia. KU)flJ]Q. KCJflOJV.
BaXarra. OaXaTTijg. OaXaTTcjv.
With the Article.
G.S. TTjg Ovpag. G.P. tojv Ovpiov.
TTJQ KUJflTjg. T(t)V K0}}10}V.
rrjg QaXarrrig. tmv OaXaTTiov.
I shall be in the middle of the market-place :
thou wilt be outside of the porch.* The road is
through the porches. Are the enemies outside
the country ? We are within the market-place,
ye are outside.* The virgins were within the
porch. The roses were in the close chariot of the
Cilician woman. The arms are not in the chariot
of the goddess. The messengers will be in the
tent of the cruel queen. The rest of the bees are in
the garden of the bride. The sister is outside the
village. Ye are in the middle of the sea. The
citizens are with the philosopher near the foun-
tains. The traitors and the youths were near the
beech-trees. The swift boat is near the island.
Thou wast near the thorns. Are the carriages near
the road ? The gardens of the judges were small.
The soldiers were not bold in the beginning of the
battle. The others are bold in the beginning of
the conflict.
* In these sentences the pronouns must be expressed, in order
to mark the contrast between "I" and "thou," "we" and
" you," which are here emphatic.
greek exercises. 19
General Remarks on the Verb.
The inflexions of the Greek verb are divided
into many classes, having reference partly to their
forms and partly to their significations :
1st. Into active, reflective or middle, and pas-
sive :
2nd. Into the indicative, subjunctive, optative,
imperative, and infinitive moods ; and as the
subjunctive and optative really constitute only a
single mood, this division agrees exactly v^^ith the
corresponding arrangement of the Latin verb :
In both languages (indeed in all languages) the
infinitive is not properly a mood, but a neuter
noun undeclined :
3rd. Into the various tenses, of which the only
ones pecuUar to Greek, as compared with Latin,
are the aorists, the signification of which will
be explained in the proper place.
ACTIVE VOICE.
Tenses of the Indicative.
The forms of the indicative are used in sen-
tences which state any thing positively ; hence
they are found in all independent sentences,
whether affirmative or interrogative.
20 GREEK EXERCISES.
XIII. — Present Tense, Accusative of Nouns
IN O, AND OF THE MaSCULINE AND NeUTER
Article.
Remark 1. The present tense is formed by
the following terminations added to the Crude
Form.
w
1. ofiev.
ac
2. £r£.
£t
3. ovai.
Example.
C. F. Xv loosen.
Xv-u) I loosen, or am
I loosening. Xv-o/isv we loosen.
Xv-ei£ thou loosenest,
&c. Xv-tTE ye loosen.
Xv-ei he loosens.
Xv-ov(n they loosen.
Remark 2. In verbs which end in a, a, or o,
the vowel of the Crude Form combines with the
initial vowel or diphthong of the terminations,
whence such verbs are called contract verbs. The
contractions (which take place only in the pre-
sent and past imperfect tenses) are made accord-
ing to the following rules, which are of universal
application.*
1. w absorbs all the short vowels; hence aw,
£ci>, 6(1), all become w.
* Only so many of the rules of contraction are here given as
are required in the pres. and past imperf. indie, tenses of the
verb.
A
GREEK EXERCISES.
21
2. a absorbs all vowels following it except o
and (o. Hence —
a-eig becomes uq.
„ are.
3. £ coalesces into the diphthong u (or the long
vowel rj) with all vowels following it except o and
to. Hence —
i-£ig becomes eig.
i-STE „ £tr£.
4. o and ov coalesce with all vowels preceding
or following, making with o or g the diphthong ov;
with a, w. o with ei becomes ot. Hence —
o-o/xtv")
, > become ovuev,
i-ofxev J '^
o-ere
yj
OVT£.
6-0V(JL 1
i-OVGL j
if
OV<JL.
a-o/Jiev
)j
tojiev
a-ov<ji
»
wai.
6-£ig
}y
oig.
6-H
fi
oT.
Examples.
C. F. Ojoa, see.
6pa-(i) 6/0(5, opa-ojULEv
6pa-ug bp^g, 6pa-ET£
6pa-u bpa, bpa-QVGL
OptxyjULEV;
bpCLTEf
bpiJUai'
22 GREEK EXERCISES
C. F. aiTE, ask for
aiTi-ii) aiTWf
aire-eig aLTeig,
aiT£-H aiTEl,
aLTE-O/JLEV aiTOVfXEVy
aiTE'ETE aiTE'lTE,
aiTE-ovcTL aiTovai.
C.F. ?»]Xo, emulate.
Z,riko-ii} ZriXw, ZriXo-OfjLEv Zr\\ov}iEV,
^riXo-Eig ^rjXotc^ ^rjXo-fre t^r^XovTE,
^rf\o-EL Zvi^ot, 2*?Xo-ov(Tt ^rjXouo-t.
Remark 3. The accusative of masc. and fem.
nouns in o is made by v in the sing., and by vg
in the plui\, added to the Crude Form. The ar-
ticle and adjective are made ace. in the same w^ay.
In the plur. the ovg becomes ovg.'^ Hence we
have not rove avdpwTrovg, but rovg avOpioirovg.
As to neuter words, see Rem. in Exerc. III.
Example.
Masc. C.F. avOpojTTO. A. S. avOpojTrov. A. P. avOpdJirovq.
Fem. vr)(To. vr]<Tov. vrjaovg.
Neut. poSo. po6ov. po^a.
Masc. A. S. Tov avOpwTrov
Neut. TO podov.
With the Article.
A. P. Tovg avOpojTTOvg.
TO poda.
* The letter v cannot stand before g, it is therefore struck
out ; and when this takes place in a final syllable, the preceding
vowel is always lengthened. In the middle of a word, the vowel
is not lengthened except when g has been substituted for another
consonant, or when another consonant besides the v has gone out.
In all these cases the lengthening of the vowel appears to be a
compensation for the loss of the consonants.
GREEK EXERCISES. 23
1. I send the messenger. Thou sendest the
new garment to the general. The steward sends
the slaves to the garden. We are pursuing the swift
horses into the plain. Ye are leading the crowd
into the park. The Athenians have the slingers
in the camp. The youths carry the arms into the
boat. The soldiers are not carrying the valuable
prizes into the house. The brave bowmen pursue
the slaves into the tower of the satrap. The slaves
are running quickly into the plain of Castolus.
We run quickly into the other garden with the
youth. Artaxerxes is leading the army against
Cyrus. We have the place. Ye have the forti-
fied places. The soldiers of Cyrus have the lofty
hills. The traitors flee to the hill. Clearchus does
not lead the barbarians into the plain. I send the
captain to Miletus in Ionia. =^ Thou art pursuing
the children to Laurium in Attica. The youths
bring the horses to Orchomenos in Boeotia.
2. We are conquering the army of the allies.
They are calling the generals into the bold citi-
zen's garden. The philosopher is explaining
the danger of the expedition. Do ye see the
crowd on the tops of the hills? I hunt the
animals in the beautiful park. Thou art pun-
ishing the traitor too severely. They conquer the
* In this and the following sentences " in " is to be translated
by the genitive ; the article also is to be used with the names
'* Ionia," &c.
24 GREEK EXERCISES.
barbarians in the beginning of the war. Thou
art practising running. He is not laughing. I
frighten the wild beasts in the middle of the field.
Ye are asking for corn for the camels. Do we
emulate the wisdom of the Grecian philosopher ?
He does nothing correctly.
XIV. — Present of Verbs increased or
STRENGTHENED,
Remark. The present and past imperfect
tenses imply the incompleteness and continuance
of an action. Neither of these tenses has any
suffix apart from the personal terminations, but
in them the Crude Form is frequently strength-
ened by a modification of the final consonant, or
by lengthening the vowel which precedes it, ac-
cording to the following rules.
1. In Crude Forms ending in mutes,
t becomes ei, as Xitt, XetTr, Meave,' (or 7, as
Tfn(5, rpl^f 'rub.')
a becomes ry, as \aB, \r}0 ' escape notice."
V becomes ev, as (j)vy, (j)Evy ' flee,' (and some-
times V, as ipvXi i^vx * breathe.')
These lengthenings of the vowel affect the
future, the first aorist, and the perfects as well
as the imperfect tenses. All the changes ex-
plained in the following sections apply to the
present and past imperfect tenses only.
f
GREEK EXERCISES. - 25
2. TTT is substituted for tt, j3, and ^, as tutt, tvttt
^ strike/ j3Xaj3, j3Xa7rr ^ hurt,' |0t<^, ^otTrr ' throw.'
3. (7(7 or rr is substituted for k, 7, and x> ^^
(fivXaK, <j)v\a(T<T ' guard/ ray, ra(7(7 ' draw up,'
Tapa\, Tapaa(T * disturb.'
Z is substituted for y and ;)^, as oijuLtjy, oljjusjZ,
* lament;' (7r£vax, o-reva? * groan.'
4. (7(7 or rr is substituted for r and d, as, TrXar,
7rXa(7(7 'smear;' KopvQ, Kopvcrcr 'put on a helmet.'
2 is substituted for 3 and r, as jcojutS, kojuli^
' take care of;' ovofiar, ovojiiaZ ' name.'
N.B. — When the vowel of a Crude Form ending
in a mute is e, the vowel never, and the consonant
seldom undergoes any change.
5. X is doubled, as j3aX, j3aXX ' pelt.'
av'\ CaiVf as (7rjjuav, crrifxaLv ^ give a
lbecome< signal.'
apj Vaip, as X'^P^ X^^P 'rejoice.'
£v^ Jciv, as rev, rctv ' stretch.'
epj \^^pf ^^ ^^^/o^ ^0£6jO 'waste.'
tv becomes 7v, as KpXv, Kp~iv ' separate.'
vv]^ (vv, as aavVf auvv 'ward off.'
w >become< - ^ - t j >
v/oj I vp, as (Tvp, (jvp drag.
N.B. — Roots ending in ju generally remain un-
changed.
6. Some verbs are increased by the addition
of (JK (con-esponding to the Latin sc, as in gno,
gno-sc); or, if they end in a consonant, of lgk, as
Ovriy Ovrj-GK * die,' kvp ivp-LGK ' find.' Sometimes
D
26' - GREEK EXERCISES.
also, the first letter of the Crude Form is doubled
with a following i; as rpw, Ti-Tpw-aK ^ wound/
7. Some verbs are increased by the syllable av
added to the Crude Form, as aiaO, aiaO-av ^ per-
ceive ;' a/uLapTf a/aapT-av ' miss,' ' err/
8. Some Crude Forms which have a short
vowel are increased by adding av, and inserting
a consonant before the final consonant. Before
labials this inserted consonant is ^, before dentals
V, before gutturals y ; as A a/3, Xa-jU-/3-av ^ take ;'
XaOi Xa-v-0-av 'escape notice;' Oijj Oi-y-y-av
' touch.'*
Thou rejoicest in the prosperity of thy friends.
The gods rejoice in sacrifices. Xerxes is col
lecting an innumerable army. The enemies are
not destroying the corn. Ye are leaving the
camp of Cyrus with the deserters. The messen-
gers of Cyrus flee to the river. The trumpeter
gives the signal. The children hear the voice of
their teacher. I hear thee.
They pelt the house with stones.f The sol-
diers pelt the boat from the towers. The trai-
* Vide Remarks on the Alphabet for an explanation of the prin-
ciples on which the changes of consonants mentioned in these rules
depend.
t " With," denoting the instrument, is to be translated by the
dative.
4
GREEK EXERCISES. 27
tors strike the brothers from horseback (say, from
the horses). The Persian pelts us with stones.
The slaves report this (tovto) to Cyrus. Ye re-
port bad tidings'*^ concerning the army of the
Athenians.
Does Cyrus assemble the barbarians into the
plain of Castolus? Ye are not enriching the friends
of the queen. I wonder at Clearchus. Ye won-
der at Orontes. We wonder at the messengers.
The supperless sailors slay the bulls.
Leonidas draws up the Lacedaemonians in
the plain. The bowmen are guarding the hills.
The soldier is guarding (the) road. They quickly
proclaim these things.f The son immediately
proclaims these things. The sailor is doing well
(that is, is faring well). Am I not doing well ?
The Athenians throw the barbarians into con-
fusion. We are digging long ditches by the side
of the river. They throw each other into con-
fusion in the narrow roads.
The general strikes the animal with his spear.
The stewards strike the horse. The fear-
ful messengers throw their arms into the river.
The friends throw the corn into the boat. The
cold wind injures the eyes of the queen.
Artaxerxes dies in the battle. Cyrus wounds
his brother. Thou teachest the tax-gatherer
these things. Teachers teach, pupils learn. Thou
* Neut. plur. of adjective. f Taura.
28 GREEK EXERCISES.
art deluding the young man. Ye are finding
these things. Do ye notice, or do ye not notice,
these things? Lysander is dying.
The faithless rower learns this. Orontes has
the plain allotted him. Thou hast the emi-
nence allotted thee. The brothers have equal
shares* allotted them. Cyrus receives the valu-
able gifts. The Corinthians escape notice. The
sisters learn this from the bowman. Does not
the slinger hit the mark ?
XV. — Future Tense, Accusative of Nouns
IN A, AND OF the FeMININE ArTICLE, Vo-
CATIVE OF Nouns in O and A.
Remark 1. The future is formed by the letter o-
added to the Crude Form. The person-endings
are the same as in the present.
Example.
C.F. \v. Tense Formf \v<t.
\v-(T-(j) I will loosen, Xv-rr-o/ttv We shall loosen,
\v-a-tiQ Tho 1 wilt loosen, Xv-a-tri Ye will loosen,
\v~(T-H He will loosen, Xv-a-ovat They will loosen.
When the C. F. ends in a, t, or o, those vowels are
generally lengthened before the a of the future ;
* Neut. plur. of adjective.
t T. F. will be used as the abbreviation of Tense Form.
GREEK EXERCISES. 29
a and e into 77, o into w. In the Attic dialect a
preceded by f, f, or p, becomes a.
With the consonants -y, k, x> ^^^ ^'^ com-
bines to form the double consonant ^ : with j3, tt,
and ^ it makes ^. Thus irpajcr becomes irpa^ ;
8fwK(r, Sf(u$ ; Tapa\(T, rapa^. /BXajStr becomes
(5\u\p : TVTTCT, TVip ', jpaijxT, ypaifj.
Remark 2. There are several consonants
which in Greek cannot stand immediately before
(T ; the future of verbs ending in such consonants
is made in two ways : either the final consonant
is struck out, or the c is omitted. The following
are the particular rules generally observed.
1. Crude Forms ending in ^, r, or 0, omit the
consonant ; thus davfiar makes fut. Oavfjiaa^ ;
irXovTi^, enrich, ttXovtkt ; iriQ, long form, irud,
persuade, tthcf.
But some Crude Forms ending in tS, and a few
others, have a future in which the o- also is
omitted, and the vowels of the terminations are
lengthened, as shewn in the following example.
C. F. vo/xtS consider.
vofiiawy
VOjXUO
V0jU<(70jU£V,
VOfXLOVfXiV
vo^iauQf
VOfllUQ
VOfJiKTETS,
VOfXlUTE
vofiLcrei,
VOfllEL^
VO/ULKTOVCFlf
vojuiovcri.
This is commonly called the Attic future, being
found chiefly in that dialect.
2. As a general rule, or cannot stand imme-
D 2
30 GREEK EXERCISES.
diately after the letters X, ju, v, p ; accordingly, in
the earlier stages of the language the future of
verbs ending in those consonants was made by
adding <j with the connecting vowel e ; but the
Greek language is opposed to having <t between
two short vowels, and in many forms rejects it;
hence the o- was omitted ; the next and final
process was the contraction of the vowels accord-
ing to the rules already given.^
Ea^ample.
BaX throw — strike.
(BaX-E-(Toj, /3tt\£-a>, /3aXw,
/3a\-c-(7£if , ^aXe-eiQjPaXtig,
(3aX-e-(Tfi, (3aXt-si, (5aXeij
f3aX-e-(rofiev, jSaXe-oiisv, (SaXovfieVf
f5aX'€-<T£T£, /SaXe-cre, /3aX£ir€,
(3aX-e-(70V(n, (5aXe-ov<n, (SaXovffi.
Remark 3. The accusative of nouns in a is
made in the same way as that of nouns in o, in
the sing, by v, and in the plur. by vg added to
the Crude Form.
* That the process here explained is not an imaginary one, but
really took place in the language, there is abundant proof. In
Homer we find such forms as oX-e-aoj (Od. v, 399), fiax-^-(T<T-
ofiai : these are the full forms : other forms occur much more fre-
quently in which the first step of the abbreviating process has taken
place ; as jSaXew for (3aXu> (11.6. 403), ayyeXeovcri for ayyeXovat
(II. t. 617 (613)). There is, moreover, nothing peculiar in the
use of a connecting vowel in the future, for many verbs always had
one (generally tj), and some verbs, whose futures are commonly
made in a different manner, are not unfrequently found with <t and
the connecting vowel tj.
GREEK EXERCISES. 31
In the plur. the v is dropped. Hence we have
not veaviavgj but veavidg, not Qvpavg, but Ovpdg.
The accusative of the feminine article is made
in the same w^ay ; sing, rrjv, plur. rag.
Read Rem. and Rules in Exerc. V. again.
Ea;amples.
Masc. C.F. veavia. A. S. veaviav. A. P. vtaviag.
TTOXlTa. TToXlTTJV. TToXlTUg.
Fem.
9vpa.
Ovpav.
Ovpag.
rpaTTsZa.
rpairt'Cav.
TpaTTi^ag
Kiofia.
KOJfllJV.
KOJfiag.
Remark 4. In the plural of all nouns, and
in the singular of neuter nouns, the vocative is
the same as the nominative.
The vocative singular of masc. and fem. nouns
in o w^as originally the same as the Crude Form.
But the o has become an f, as in Latin. Of
masculine nouns in a those which end in ra, and
some others, have the voc. sing, the same as the
Crude Form; the rest make it by lengthening
the a, or changing it into rj, as in the nom. The
voc. sing, of feminine nouns in a is the same
as the nominative. The vocative being the case
used in addressing or calling to a person or
thing, there are many words which from their
nature cannot have that case ; one of these words
is the article.
32
GREEK EXERCISES.
C.F. Trpo^ora traitor.
TrpoSorrjg,
npoSoTov,
irpodory,
TrpoCOTTjV,
TrpoSora.
C. F. ^aaikiaaa queen.
^aaCKiGGriQ,
(iaoCKKjat],
(iaaCKiaaav,
j3a(nXi(T(ra.
Connected View of the Inflexions of
Nouns in a and o.
As the plural of nouns in a is the same in all
classes, it is not repeated.
C. F. TO TUfxia the steward.
N. 6 Tafiiag, oi rafiiai,
G. Tov TttfiioVf T<Dv raixiov,
D. r<^ TUfii^, roig rafiiaig,
A. TOV rafiiav, rovg rafiiag,
V. ra^ia, rafnai.
C.F. ra Ovaia the sacrifice.
N. t) Ovffia, al Ovaiai,
G. T-qg 9v<Tiag, tojv Ovffiwv,
D. ry Ovffia, raig Ovaiaig,
A. TT]v Ovffiav, rag Ovaiag,
V. OvcTLU, Ovaiaif
C. F. (jxova voice.
N. (pOJVT],
G. (pojvrjg,
D. <p(i)vy,
A. (pujvtjv,
V. (p(i)VT].
C. F. oiKo household (Masc). C. F. to x^P^^ the place (Neut.).
N. oiKog, oiKOi, N. TO x^piov. Ta xiopia,
G. OlKOVf OlKUJVf G. TOV Xf^^P'OV, T<i)V XiOpHiiV,
D. oiKi^, oiKoig, D. ry x'^P'-Vf '"^^^ X^P^^'C>
A. oiKov, oiKovg, A. to x^P^ov, Ta %wpio,
V. oi/ce, oiKoi. V. x^P'-^^t X^P'-^'
When the final a or o of the Crude Form is
preceded by f or o, the substantives or adjectives
have their terminations contracted according to the
rules already given ; thus oo becomes ov ; ooi, oi ;
ea becomes d in the neuter and r} in the feminine.
GREEK EXERCISES. 33
Several substantives and adjectives in o have
w instead of o, ov or a, and o^ instead of ot. This
is called the Attic declension.
Similarly to nouns in a and o are declined the
relative pronoun 6 (M & N) a (F) ; — avro (M &
N), avra (F) self, he, she, it (answering to the
Latin eo, and sometimes to ipso) ; — to avro the
same (M & N);— rovro (M & N), Tavra (F)
this ; and aWo (M &: N) aXXa (F) other ; except
that these words have no case-ending (v) in the
neut. nom. and ace. singular, and that in the nom.
(both sing, and plur.) masc. and fern, of tovto,
the r is changed into the aspirate as in the article.
The neut. nom. and ace. plural of tovto is ravra.
In the following exercises, the first division contains verbs the
future of which is made according to the 1st Remark ; the second,
those whose futures are formed according to Rem. 2, Rule 1 ; and
the third, those comprised in Rem. 2, Rule 2.
1. I shall write this letter.* Thou wilt encircle
the Persian's head with a beautiful wreath. We
will send messengers to Thebes. Ye will lead them
into the village with the heavy-armed. Darius
will do well. With-the-aid-of the gods to whom
ye sacrifice, ye will fare well. I will come soon.
The satrap will come into the tent. These* sol-
diers will bury the cowardly general. I will send
the satrap back to the same government. Cyrus
will throw the enemies into confusion. The
* Use the article after the pronoun.
34 GREEK EXERCISES.
generals will draw up the soldiers who are pre-
sent, for battle. Ye will soon turn the Lycians to
flight. Thou wilt violate the truce which thou art
now making. The barbarians will not pursue us
into the river. I will send the soldiers and youths
to the island. We will do this concerning Orontes.
The wind will injure the young trees which ye
are planting. The travellers will behold many
wonderful (things). We will explain to him
what^ we wish. Ye will easily conquer the
faithless traitors. I will ask for the arms of
the fearful deserters. Thou wilt practise the
whole day.f Ye will emulate the valour of the
bold satrap
2. We will persuade the soldiers. The soldiers
will place the general whom they love upon J the
throne. I will persuade the islanders. Will ye
assemble the good children inj the large field ?
He will place the beautiful virgin inj the other
boat. Thou wilt admire the other new gift from
the citizen.
Attic Future. — I shall consider this an
honour. We shall hope for many good things
from thee, O Clearchus. Thou wilt carry the
load, O virgin, into the village which thou seest
under the hill. The same vessel will carry the
corn. Ye will bring the gold with other gifts.
* Use neut. plur. of relative pi-onoun ** which."
t Duration of time is expressed by the accusative.
X Use the preposition eig.
GREEK EXERCISES. 35
We will not reproach thee with thy weakness, O
queen. They will arm the horses with frontlets.
Thou wilt not care for wars. Ye will not care
for the war, O citizens.
3. Truce orwar shall I report to her ? Thou wilt
report war, O messenger. The satrap will imme-
diately strike the slave with a spear. Whether
will ye remain, or shall I report war from you,
Lacedaemonians ? The generals will remain in
this tent till noon. I will wait in the house till
evening. Thou wilt send away the vessels to
Aegina. Whether will ye send away the vessels
to Naxos or to Lemnos ? The trumpeter will
give the signal. We will distribute the corn to
the soldiers. This judge will distribute the wine
to the messengers in the house. The colonists
will clear the land. The slave will not sow
equally. The Persian will kill the youth with a
sword, O Athenian. We will kill thee. Will ye
shew the hidden money ?
XVI. — Past Imperfect Tense; the Augment;
Comparative and Superlative of Adjec-
tives.
Remark 1. The Past Imperfect is used in
speaking of an action as continuing and incom-
plete, or as habitually or frequently performed,
in past time.
Remark 2. The Past Imperfect is made from
the Crude Form, or from the Increased Form,
36 GREEK EXERCISES.
where there is one (See Rem., Exerc. XIV.), by
the addition of a prefix called the Augment, and
by the following terminations.
OV 1 OfliV
eg 2 £r£
£(r dropped) 3 ov{r dropped).
The jLt of the 1st singular, which is retained in
Latin, has in this and many other tenses of the
Greek verb become v. The r in the 3rd singular
and plural is dropped.* EXvov, 1st singular, is
the euphonic form of eXvo/j,, and eXvov, 3rd plural,
is the euphonic form of eXvovr.
Remark 3. The augment is confined to the
Indicative mood, and to the past tenses of that
mood ; viz. the past imperfect and past perfect,
and the aorists.
The augment is of two kinds; the syllabic,
which is the vowel e prefixed to verbs begin-
ning with a consonant ; and the temporal,
which consists in lengthening the initial vowel
of verbs commencing with a short vowel, accord-
ing to the following table.
a and e become rj, (e sometimes becomes ai.)
becomes w.
1 and V become 7 and v.
When the verb begins with the diphthongs at or
OL, the L is subscript in the tenses which take
thje augment : thus, aiaO becomes yaO ; oix o^X'
* See Remark 2 on the Alphabet.
GREEK EXERCISES.
37
Verbs beginning with long vowels, or with the
diphthongs u and ev, rarely have an augment,
and those beginning with ou, never.
Verbs beginning with p, repeat the p after the
augment ; as, pnrT, eppiirrov.
Verbs compounded with prepositions, take the
augment after the prepositions, which (except
nepi and tt/oo) lose their final vowels before the
augment : thus, aTro-crrfX becomes aTr-e-artXX.
In irpo the o and e generally make ov.
When a preposition ends in a consonant, that
consonant is often changed before the initial con-
sonant of the verb to which it is prefixed; thus
Ev before labials becomes 6/i, before gutturals ay :
but when the augment is inserted, the preposition
resumes its proper form."^
Examples.
C. F. \v. Imperf. T. F. e-\v.
t-\v-ov I was loosening,
(-\v-eg Thou wast loosening,
e-\v-i He was loosening.
e-\v-on£v We were loosening,
e-Xv'tTt Ye were loosening,
e-\v-ov They were loosening.
C. F. TVTT. I. F. TVTTT.
T.F. e-TVTTT.
i-rVKT-OVy e-TVTTT-OflSV,
e-TVTTT-eg, e-rvTrT-ere,
t-TVTTT-e. S-TVTTT-OV.
C.F. (TvX-Xey. T.F. ffvv-s-Xty.
<7vv-e-Xey-0Vy (xvv-e-Xey-oixevy
<Tvv-t-Xey-fg, ovv-t-Xfy-trt,
(Tvv-£-Xsy-e. avv-t-Xey-ov.
* Vide Remarks on the Alphabet for the particular rules.
38
GREEK EXERCISES.
CONTRACT
VERBS.*
C. F. viKa.
T. F. f'ViKa.
t-VlKU-OV
t-VlK(ji)V,
e-viKOL-ofiev
e-viKutfitv,
e-viKa-eg
e-vLKag^
l-VlKa-tTt
f-viKart,
f-viKa-f
e-viKa.
t-viKa-ov
. t-VlKWV.
C. F. aiTf .
T. F. yTf.
yTt-ov
yrovv,
yTt-ofjtev
yTovfiev,
yrt-eg
. . yreic,
yTe-STt
yrelre,
yTS-e
7JTtl.
yre-ov
yTOVv.
C. F. op9o.
T. F. u)p9o.
ojpOo'Ov
MpOoVV,
lOpOo-OfiSV
bjpOovfievj
Ojp9o-tQ
. . lopOovg,
WpOo-STS
WpOoVTEy
ojpBo-s
lopOov.
(i)p9o-ov
wpOovv.
Remark 2. There are two ways of forming
the comparative and superlative of adjectives.
Only one of these will be explained here, being
that which applies to nearly all adjectives in o,
and to many others.
The comparative is made by adding repo (M.
&; N.) or repa (F.) to the Crude Form of the
simple adjective : the superlative by adding raro
(M. & N.) or rara (F.)
When the last syllable but one of the Crude
Form is short, the o of the Crude Form is length
ened in the comparative and superlative. If it
were not, there would be a concurrence of short
syllables unpleasant to the ear.
J
* Vide Rules for Contraction of Vowels, Exerc. XIII.
GREEK EXERCISES. 39
The neuter forms of the comparative and su-
perlative adjective are used adverbially.
Examples.
C. F. TTioTo 'faithful,' Comp. Trtoro-rfpo. Sup. TnaTo-Taro.
cro^o'wise.* (TO<})(i)-Tspo. <ro^w-raro.
avaideg ' shameless.' avai^ta-repo avaiSear-raro.
1. I was writing the letter in the tent, O sister.
He was sending the messengers to Thebes. We
were sending the husbandman to Cume. Ye
were leading the citizens. The brothers used
to sacrifice on the eminences. The rest were
weeping in the tent. The Lacedaemonians were
violating their oaths. The general spoke thus.
The scout ran forward from the tree under which
he was.
2. The soldiers were burying the dead in the
park. We used to consider thee to be wiser than*
the other Athenians. The philosopher was the
wisest of men. The brave islanders were ascending
the eminences. With the aid of the gods the
Athenians prospered (say, did well). The Per-
sians were fleeing to the tent. The Rhodians
used to shoot farther than the mark. The bar-
barians were throwing (missiles) from the height,
and wounding many of the enemies. Cyrus col-
lected the most able of his friends. The sailor
* "Than," after a comparative, is expressed by the genitive of
the word following it.
40 GREEK EXERCISES.
was very skilful about nautical affairs.* I am
more acquainted with the country than the Per-
sian (is). Tlie judges are the most faithful of
my (the) friends.
3. They were asking for gold and silver. We
were conquering all the enemies of the Athenians.
I did not let my house for hire. He was hunting
the wild asses in the desert. Thou wast waging
war against the faithless deserters. Ye were
punishing the more shameless husbandmen. They
never did any thing correctly. The scouts were
seeking the camp of the enemy. The master was
summoning the faithless slaves. We were making
the hill bare of trees.
XVII. — Second Aorist ; Consonant, or Sepa-
rable Declension.
Remark 1. The Greek term 'Aorist' means
indefinite. In the Indicative, the. aorist tense is
the indefinite past, describing an action as past,
but not precisely defining the time of its per-
formance. It is used only in speaking o{ single
completed actions, not of continuing actions,
nor of such as habitually took place.-f-
* Neuter plural of adjective with article.
t The aorist is in most cases equivalent to the past tense of the
English verb ; but far from universally so, inasmuch as we com-
monly use that tense when speaking of habitual or repeated
GREEK EXERCISES. 41
There are two forms for this tense. One form
is called the 1st aorist; the other, the 2nd aorist.
These names (1st and 2nd) must not be under-
stood as implying that the 1st is the older form
of the aorist, for the contrary is probably the
fact; they are used merely to distinguish the two
forms readily. It is important to remark also
that there is no difference whatever in the signifi-
cation of the two aorists.
The 2nd aorist is made by prefixing the aug-
ment, as in the past imperfect, and by adding the
same person-endings to the Crude Form.
The difference in form between the past imper-
fect and the 2nd aorist is, that in the former (the
past incomplete), as in the present incomplete, the
Increased Form is used ; in the aorist, the Crude
Form. The 2nd aorist bears the same relation to
the Crude Form as the past imperfect to the In-
creased Form. Verbs which have no Increased
Form have no aorist of this kind, for in such verbs
the 2nd aorist would have the same form as the
past imperfect ; but not all verbs which have an
actions. The English present perfect is not unfrequently em-
ployed in speaking of a single completed action in past time : and
hence the Greek aorist is sometimes to be translated by that tense.
Thus in the sentence, " I have often heard him speak," the thing
spoken of not being habitual, nor repeated at the same time, but
each "hearing" being distinct and unconnected with all the
others, we must use the aorist : TroXKuKig avrov XeyovTog
TjKovcra. The proper use of the Greek perfect will be hereafter
explained.
E 2
42 GREEK EXERCISES.
Increased Form have a 2nd aorist. No rules can
be given for determining what verbs have the
2nd aorist : this can be learned only by practice
and from lexicons. Verbs which have not the
2nd, take the 1st aorist : a very few verbs have
both.
Examples.
C.F. XiTT.
I.F. X£^7r.
Aor. T.F. £-Xt7r.
1st Pers. £-Xt7r-ov.
Aor. T. F. £-(^v7.
„ €-/za0.
„ £-Kpay.
Imp. T.F. £-X£<7r.
1st Pers. £-X£t7r-ov.
Imp. T.F. e-<l)£vy.
„ e-fiavOav.
„ E-KpaZ,
Remark 2. The Consonant-declension is so
called because most nouns declined according to
it end in a consonant. (The rest end in the
vowel If V, or w) It is also called the Separable
Declension, because the case-endings can be
separated from the Crude Form, leaving it entire,
more easily than in the a and o declension.
The different cases of masc. and fern, nouns are
made by the following terminations added to the
Crude Form.
Sing.
Plur.
c
Nom.
€C
C. F. or g
Voc.
^^
oc
Gen.
(jJV
I
Dat.
ai
a
er u or i, V ^
(ag.
Ace.
\ generally vg, i. e. g with
. the vowel lengthened.
GREEK EXERCISES. 43
I. EXAMPLE OF NOUN ENDING IN A CONSO-
NANT.
C.F.
KopaK '
' a crow.'
KopaK-g = Kopa^
N.
KOpaK-eg
KOpaK-g = KOpa^
V.
KopaK-eg
KOpaK-OQ
G.
KOpaK-OJV
KopaK-i
D.
KOpaK-(TL = KOpaKi
KopaK-a
A.
KOpaK-ag.
The rules given in reference to the combination
of or with the various classes of consonants in
Rem. 1, ExERC. XV., are mostly applicable to the
nom. sing, and dat. plur. of nouns ending in a
consonant. The following rules, however, are
also necessary in reference to those cases.
1. Nouns ending in v or p do not take tr in the
nominative, and if a short vowel precede the v or
p in a masc. or fem. noun, it is lengthened ; thus
pr}Top becomes prjrwp; avep, avr^p; TrarfjO, waTtip;
TToijuiev, TTotjurjv; ^aiiuLov^ Satjuwv. In the dat. plur.
V is dropped before the ai ; but in nouns ending
in p no change is made in the Crude Form in
that case, except in those which end in £p, which
transpose ep into pa, as iranp, Trarpaai.
2. Nouns ending in ovt make the nom. sing, by
dropping r and lengthening the o. Thus yspovr
becomes yepujv. In the dat. plur. vr are struck
out before the en, and the o is lengthened into ov ;
yepovT-ai becomes y^povcn.
44 GREEK EXERCISES.
3. Masc. nouns ending in avr make the
nom. sing, by adding o-, vr are dropped, and
the a is lengthened. The dat. plur. is made in
the same way; yiyawj N.S. yiydg; D.P. yi-
yaai.
4. Masc. and fern, adjectives ending in ^g make
the nom. sing, in rjc '- in the other cases the <r
coming between two vowels is dropped, and the
usual contractions take place ; hence, in the ace.
sing. £a becomes i). Neuter substantives in cc
make the nom. sing, in og ; the nom. plur. in r\ ;
the neut. nom. sing, of adjectives is the same as
the Crude Form. The only masc. substantives
of this kind are proper names of men derived
from neater nouns, and there are no fem. sub-
stantives properly so called, but a few adjectives
become so by the ellipse of a fem. subtantive, as
rpLr]pr\Qy which is vavg Tpirjprjg, The adjectives
and neut. substantives are numerous.
Ea^amples.
aXrjOeg, true. Masc. and Fem.
aXrjOrjQ N. a\ri9{e(T-£Q,eeg)tic
a\Ti9{e(T-og,eog)-ovQ G. a\i]9(e(T-ojv,eu)v)-(ov
a\r]9{e<7-i,ti)-ei D. a\i]9(£(T-(n)-£<n
aXT}B{e(T-a,ea)-ij A. a\t)9{e<T-ag,eag)-eLg
av9£g,* a flower.
Neut.
av9og av9r]
av9ovg av9ii)v
av9ei av9e<Ti
av9og av9r}.
♦ Compare with this the Latin neuter nouns in es and os, both
of which classes make the nominative singular in us, as genus,
tempus. In Latin, instead of striking out the * in the other
cases, it is changed into r : a similar change takes place in many
parts of the Latin verb.
GREEK EXERCISES. 45
6. Similarly are declined a few feminine nouns
in oc, nom. sing, wg or w.
II. EXAMPLE OF NOUN
ENDING IN V.
C.F.
ixOv ' a
fish.'
ix9v-Q
N.
iX^v-^g
ixOv
V.
ixOv-eg
ixOv-og
G.
ix0v-(jjv
IX^V-L
D.
ixOv-ai
ixOv-v
A.
iX^^Q or ixOv-ag.
III. EXAMPLE OF NOUN ENDING IN I.
In all cases of nouns ending in f, except the
nominative, vocative, and accusative singular, the
I of the Crude Form becomes e, and then the
ordinary contractions take place. 7roXe'i=7ro\eif
TroXe-sg=7roXeig, iro\e-ag=^7ro\eig. The last is
not a regular contraction, but whenever the nom.
and accus. plural are both contracted, the ace.
is made the same as the nom.
C. F. TToXi, fem. ' a city.'
TToXig
N.
woXeig
TToXl
V.
TToXsig
TToXswg
G.
TToXstjJV
iroXei
D.
TToXetTi
TToXlV
A.
iroXsig.
A few nouns ending in v are declined exactly
like those ending in i : that is, the v is changed
into £ in all cases except the nominative, accu-
sative, and vocative singular ; and the same con-
46 GREEK EXERCISES.
tractions take place : so 7rr/x^> ^ cubit. In the
same way are declined adjectives ending in v,
except that the genitive singular ends in og, not
in wg ; in the neut. the nom. singular is the same
as the Crude Form, and in the plural sa remains
uncontracted. So jXvkv, * sweet/
The vocative case of nouns of this declension
is either flectionless, being the Crude Form
(which is the case with all nouns in v and t), or
the same as the nominative.
But when the Crude Form ends in a consonant
which cannot stand at the end of a word, it is
dropped to make the vocative, unless that case
is the same as the nominative. Thus the voc. of
TTatS, boy, is wai : of yiyavr, yiyav. Avqkt, king,
has two vocatives, ava and ava^.
I left the country of the Molossians. Thou
didst leave the plain of Castolus. The Persian
fled out of the camp. Some remained in the
village, others fled.'^ Ye left the city and we fled
towards the river. The shepherds hit the wolf
with stones. Cyrus took Tissaphernes as a true
friend. The Cilician woman took pledges. The
* Some ... others, oifxev ... aide — the particles /zei/ and df are
used chiefly to point out the words or clauses opposed to each
other.
GREEK EXERCISES. 47
Athenians entered into the cities on the same day
(dat.). Cyrus received the refugees with the old
men. Those of (out of) the market-place left
their most valuable merchandise for the refugees.
We learnt these things from the shepherds. Thou
didst learn these more necessary things from the
Thracian, O boy. The boys learnt these things
fiom the commanders of the city. The disease
escaped the notice of the physician. Xenophon
had the village and the mountains allotted him.
I had the command of these nations allotted me.
The boys came to the door of the house with the
fishes. The commander, who was very fond of
danger, died in the war, O old man. Many of
the Greeks died in the battle, O Xenophon. The
sons of the old man hit the mark. The youth
came into the village in which the refugee was.
Ye threw away your shields in the villages of the
Thracians. I lost two hundred soldiers. Not
many of them escaped the notice of the Greeks.
XVIII. — First Aorist.
Remark. The other form of the aorist tense,
commonly called the First Aorist, is made by the
augment prefixed,* and the syllable o-a affixed to
* Vide ExERC. XVI. for the rules respecting the augment.
48 GREEK EXERCISES.
the Crude Form, with the following termina-
tions.
Sing.
Plur.
(ju dropped*)
1.
fXEV
c
2.
TE
(r dropped''^)
3.
v{t dropped*),
In the 3rd singular the a of the Tense Form
becomes e.
The remarks made in Exerc. XV. respecting
the changes both of vowels and consonants which
take place before the a of the future apply of
course to this tense also ; the following differ-
ences, however, between the two tenses are to be
noted.
1st. All verbs ending in S make the 1st aorist
by dropping the ^ before the o- of the suffix,
which is retained.
2nd. Verbs ending in X, /x, v, p, add a only to
make the tense form of the 1st aorist, and
lengthen the vowel of the Crude Form, as shewn
in the following table.f
* Vide Rem, 2 on the Alphabet, and compare with the full
forms the Latin terminations, as shewn in such words as ama-ba-m,
ama-h-at, ama-ba-nt.
t It has been suggested that probably the ca was originally
added ; then the a assimilated to the final consonant of the Crude
Form ; and lastly, the first of the two consonants omitted, to
compensate for which the vowel of the root was lengthened,
e.g. e-yafi-cra, e-yafi-fia, £-yT]f^a. This explanation, however,
may be questioned.
GREEK EXERCISES. 49
a becomes rj or a, as
ydfi
marry Is
t A. t-ynn-a.
KBpdav
gain
e-Kspddv-a.
(TTeK
send
e-oraX-a.
KpXv
separate
s-Kplv-a.
afxvv
ward off
rj-fxvv-a.
Example.
C.F. \v. T.F. B-Xv-aa.
e-\v-(Ta I loosened, t-Xv-ara-fiiv We loosened,
e-\v-<Ta-Q Thou loosenedst, s-Xv-tra-re Ye loosened,
t'Xv-<Ts He loosened, e-Xv-<Ta-v They loosened.
Similarly with C.F. opOo, T.F. wpOw-aa; C.F.
TTpay, T.F. e-TTpa^a; C.F. vojut^, T.F. e-vo/xt-ca ;
C.F. eXa, T.F. ijXa-cra.
1. I did not violate the truce. Thou didst vio-
late the truce. We sent the messenger immedi-
ately to Thebes in Boeotia. The Greeks buried
their commander in Laconia. The impudent
messenger spoke to the heralds as follows (say,
these things). His mother sent him back again
to his goverament with the shieldmen and rear-
guards. After this most dreadful battle the Greeks
and the heralds sailed away to the island. The
Athenians sent the herald back to Athens. We
made an expedition against Croesus with the
Greeks. The old man shut the gates of the city. The
Thracian struck the commander of the village.
The Greeks burnt down the palace. We wrote
the letters immediately. The commander of the
village cut down the trees on the mountain.
50
GREEK EXERCISES.
The same traveller burnt down some trees, and cut
down others.* We turned the three thousand to
flight. Cyrus marched through the plain to
Tarsi, a city of Cilicia. Cyrus sent with the Ci-
lician woman Menon and his soldiers. Xenias, the
Arcadian, and the Greeks did these things in the
march. Ye threw each other into confusion in the
very narrowf roads. Cyrus appointed a captain
over each of the stations. We wondered at the
folly of the herald. The colonists enriched the
shepherds. Ye placed many good things upon
the tables. I easily conquered the heavy-armed
men in the battle. The commander punished the
deserters severely (heavily). Did ye demand the
arms of the Greeks ? These disciples of the philo-
sophers often imitated their masters. The scout
expended the money of the captain.
2. He reported the other things eagerly to the
Mede. Suitable messengers reported the mat-
tersj from the barbarians to the Greeks. They
remained five days in the country of the Cardu-
chians. There we remained seven days. He sent
away the vessels to Aegina. The trumpeter gave
the signal with the trumpet to the Greeks. We
purified the army. He himself killed the bear.
Didst thou kill the wolf ? I distributed the corn
and the flowers to the soldiers. The ambassadors
* Vide note, p. 46. f Use the superlative.
X Neut. plur. of art.
GREEK EXERCISES. 51
remained in the palace till evening. The slaves
warded ofF the attack. The husbandmen did not
sow equally.
XIX. — Present Perfect ; Reduplication —
Neuter Nouns of the Consonant De-
clension.
Remark 1. This tense generally corresponds
to the English present perfect, as, " They have
finished the work," — but not always (vide note,
p. 40). The Greek pres. perf. is strictly used only
in speaking of an action, &c. the result of which
still continues.
Remark 2. The pres. perfect is made from the
Crude Form by a prefix called the reduplication,
which in verbs beginning with a consonant consists
of that consonant and the connecting vowel e, and
in verbs beginning with a vowel is the same as the
temporal augment ;* and by suffixing /ca, a, or a.
The person-endings are like those of the 1st
aorist except that of the 3rd plural.
(ju dropped) 1. jufv.
C 2. r£.
(r dropped) 3. {a)(TL,
As in the 1st aorist, the ji and t are dropped, and
in the 3rd sing, the a of the Tense-Form becomes
€. Hence we have not XcXuKar, but XcXuke.
* These are the general rules, the exceptions will be explained
in the following remarks.
52 GREEK EXERCISES.
Example,
C.F. \v. T.F. \t-\v-Ka.
Xe-Xv-Ka I have loosened, Xe-Xv-Ka-fiev We have loosened,
Xe-Xu-Ka-e Thou hast loosened, Xe-Xv-Ka-Ts Ye have loosened,
Xe-Xv-Ke He has loosened, Xe-Xv-Kd-ai They have loosened.
Similarly C.F. tvtt. — T.F. TETv(pa (= rervw a);
C.F. ypacj) — T.F. ycyjoa^a ( — ye-y/oo^ «) ; C.F.
(TTpaT£V T.F. £(TTpaT£VKa; C.F. TTOtf — T.F.
TreTTOirjKa ; C. F. opOof T. F. wpOwKa,
Remark 3. The following general rules are
to be observed in reference to the reduplication ;
but there are many exceptions to some of them.
1. Verbs beginning with an aspirated consonant
take the corresponding thin letter in the redu-
plication ; thus, 9v ' sacrifice ' becomes rSvKa ;
(pov^v, 7rs(l>ov£VKa ; xpycro, KSXpvaioKa.
2. Verbs beginning with p take only the aug-
ment (the p being doubled) ; pacj) ' sew ' makes
perfect eppa(l)a.^
3. Verbs which begin with a double consonant
or with two consonants, the latter of which is not
a liquid, do not receive the reduplication, but only
the syllabic augment.
4. The reduplication, or the augment which
takes its place, is not confined to the indicative
mood, as is the case with the augment properly
* It seems probable that in these verbs the reduphcation was at
first regularly prefixed ; but the liquids have a great tendency to
change places with the vowels, so that pepacp might easily become
(ppwp. This conjecture is confirmed by the occurrence of the
form pepvTTwfieva in Odyss. ^. 59.
GREEK EXERCISES. 53
SO called, but belongs to all the perfect forms of
the verb, infinitives and participles included.
Remark 4. The following are the general
rules relative to the suffixes of this tense.
1. Ka is used when the Crude Form ends in a
vowel, liquid, or dental : a, e, and o are generally
lengthened before the suffix, as in the 1st aorist ;
and a dental is dropped, jca may be added after
any consonant by means of the vowel jj ; as from
fxaOj rvXf are formed jue-imaOrjKaf r£-ru;)(rjica.
2. a is added to verbs ending in an unaspi-
rated labial or guttural, with which the breathing
of the suffix combines, forming the corresponding
aspirated letter; thus /3Xaj3 becomes jStjSXa^a;
TTpay, ir^Trpa^a.
3. a is used when the Crude Form ends in an
aspirated consonant.
4. Many verbs not ending in aspirated conso-
nants take the suffix a ; these are called 2nd
perfects, and often have an intransitive or passive
meaning : this is especially the case with those
verbs which have both perfects : the 1st perf»
generally having a transitive, the 2nd, an intran-
sitive or passive signification: thus, 1st perf
oX-(t>X-£-Ka ^ I have destroyed ;' 2nd perf. oX-wX-a
' I have perished.' But in many instances even
the 1st perfect has an intransitive meaning : thus,
from <^u 'produce' comes 1st perf. Tre-^v-ica * I
was produced ' or * born.'
Remark 5. The vowel of the Crude Form is
subject to the following changes in the perfects.
F 2
54 GREEK EXERCISES.
1. € always becomes o in the 2nd perf. : <^0£|O
* destroy ;' 2nd perf. £-(f>0op'a.
2. E before a liquid in monosyllabic words be-
comes a in the 1st perf. : dreX, 1st perf. e-araX-Ka.
3. When a root has a short form with t, and a
long form with sl (vide p. 24) the 1st perf. has ei,
but the 2nd oi : e. g. iriO ; 1st perf. Trc-Tret-ica ; 2nd
perf. Tre-iroiO-a.
4. When a monosyllabic root has a long form,
that form is used in the 2nd perf. : e. g. (f>vy ;
2nd perf. we-tpevy-a : but in disyllabic roots of
the same kind, the 2nd perf. has the short form :
e.g. eXvO 'come;' long form, iXevO ; 2nd perf.
eX-YiXvO-a.
Remark 6. Neuter nouns of the consonant
declension differ from masculine and feminine
nouns in the nominative and accusative cases only.
In the nominative singular they have no case-
ending. The nominative and accusative plural
are made by the suffix a.
The terminations of the other cases are the
same as those of masculine and feminine nouns.
Example.
C. F. TTpayfiar * an affair.'^
TTpajfULa
N.
irpayfxaT-a
irpayjia
V.
irpayfxar-a
Trpayfiar-og
G.
TrpajjLaT-tJV
irpayfiaT-L
D.
irpayfxa-aL
irpayfia
A.
wpayfxuT-a
* The T of the Crude Form is lost in Trpay/xa, because it
GREEK EXERCISES. 55
I have violated this truce. Cyrus is dead (has
died). We have learnt the Persian language.
The boys have learnt the Greek language. We
have devised these things. The soldiers have
plotted against us. I have sought for you all
day. The enemies have entered the fortifica-
tion. We have picked up the arrows. I have
planted the trees in the park w^hich is full of
flowers. Thou hast taught me this. The bar-
barians have taught us avarice. The satrap has
sent away the same vessels to the Hellespont.
The army has plundered the citizens. The ge-
nerals are dead. I have written the letters.
The enemies have murdered a hundred citi-
zens. Who has seen the old man? Ye have
done^ well. The traitors have reported these
things. The trumpeter has collected a crowd in
the market-place. Pausanias has fled to Tegea.
The rest of the women have fled to the deep
river. I have sent the messengers to Sparta.
The judges have assigned one share to each-man
by lot. We have asked for the letter which the
herald was carrying to Cyrus. The barbarians
have made an expedition against the Corinthians.
I have sacrificed many victims for you. Aga-
memnon has given more valuable presents to me.
The whole army has perished.* The oars
are fixed in the ground.* The staff is broken.*
cannot stand at the end of a word ; and it is lost in irpayfiaffi
because it cannot stand before <r.
* In these tenses the 2nd perfect is to be used.
56 GREEK EXERCISES.
I have wounded the commander in the thigh.*
Seuthes has enriched him. The Greeks have en-
riched their own commander. Ye have con-
quered the cowardly deserters. The heralds have
explained the wish of the general to the Greeks.
We have destroyed many very valuable wares.
The old man has persuaded the mother of the
queen.
XX.— Past Perfect: Nouns in EY (EF).
Remark 1. The tense form of the past perfect
differs from that of the present perfect in having
the syllabic augment as well as the reduplication
prefixed (the augment, however, being here, as in
all other cases, confined to the indicative), and in
the suflSx, which for the past perfect is kei, ct, or
£1. All the rules given respecting the present per-
fect apply to this tense also. When the redupli-
cation is reduced to the augment, the prefix of
the past is the same as that of the present
perfect.
The person-endings are the following.
V 1 . fxev
g 2. rt
(r dropped) 3. aav
* Limiting words, such as "thigh" in this sentence, are put
in the accusative.
GREEK EXERCISES. 57
Example.*
e-\i-\v-Kei-v I had loosened, e-Xt-Xv-Kei-fiev We had loosened,
t-\s-Xv-KH-g Thou hadst loos- e-Xe-Xv-Ksi-re Ye had loosened,
ened,
s-Xe-Xv-Ket He had loos- e-Xe-Xv-Ksi-<Tav They had loos-
ened, ened.
Similarly C.F. tvtt; T. F. £TeTV(f)£i ( = £r£ru7r It)*
C.F. ypa(p ; T.F. ey£ypa(f)£i { = eyey pa(l> ei). C.F.
(TTpaTsv; T. F. a(TTpaT£VKei.
Remark 2. Nouns in sv differ somewhat from
other nouns of the separable declension from this
circumstance. The v was originally a F, and
when that character fell into disuse, the v was
substituted for it in some of the cases, and it was
dropped altogether in the others. In the dative
singular and nominative plural, and sometimes
also in the accusative plural, the £ and the vowel of
the termination coalesce to form the diphthong
£1.
C. F. jSao-tXft; or jSao-iXfF ' a king.'
/3ao-fX£KC
N.
j3a(7fX££c, contracted j5a(nX£ig.
f^acn\£v
V.
j5a(n\££gj contracted (5a(nX£tg.
j5a(n\£cog
G.
jSao-tXfwv.
f^aaiXei
D.
j3a(7fX£UO-t.
|3a(TfX£a
A.
|3aa"tXfac, contracted (3acnX£ig,
* The forms here given are those found in most editions of the
Greek writers ; but the following are the correct Attic termina-
tions : t], tjg or fif , ft ; e/xev, ere, e(Tav ; as, eXtXvKT], tXeXvKrjg,
eXeXvKti ; eXsXvicsfxsv, eXeXvKSTe, eXeXvKStrav. In the 3rd plural
the termination eaav generally appears in the best MSS., and is
restored in all recent editions.
58 GREEK EXERCISES.
Ye had never violated the truce. Thou hadst
sought for the pebble in the vineyard. The scouts
had found the footsteps of many horses. We and
the boys had learnt the Persian language. The
lady had devised these things. The strangers
had entered the villages in the country of the
Phrygians. The Greeks had lighted many fires
on the eminences on this night. This satrap
had sailed away to Ephesus. The army had
plundered the fugitives. He himself had taught
the youths avarice. We had planted the trees
which were in the park. I had seen this old man.
Pausanias had fled to Tegea. The priest had put
on a woman's robe. Thou hadst sacrificed to
Athene. Ye had enriched the commander in this
war. I had sacrificed many victims for them.
Agamemnon had sacrificed in Aulis. I had sent
these messengers to Sparta. We had sent that
letter to Cyrus. Thou hadst wounded me in the
thigh. The Greeks had shot farther than the
Persians. The boys had fled with the shepherds
from the mountains into the meadow. Ye had
made an expedition against the Athenians in this
war. The thieves had assigned their shares by
lot. The workmen had depopulated the country.
Cyrus had waged war against his own brother.
The boy's mother had been ill until midnight.
I had hunted the fox in the meadow. The
assistants had collected all the images. The
unjust steward had reported the death of the
GREEK EXERCISES. 59
horses to the master. The cold had destroyed all
the younger trees upon the hill.
THE SUBJUNCTIVE AND OPTATIVE
MOODS.
The forms of the verb arranged into these two
classes are those found in dependent sentences
only ; the difference between the subjunctive and
optative being, that the tenses of the former are
SiWpresent ; those of the latter, 2i\\past : in reality,
they form but one mood, answering to the Latin
subj unctive.
Both moods generally imply some uncertainty,
either in the action itself or in its circumstances.
XXI. — Tenses of the Subjunctive.
Remark 1. There are three tenses in this
mood : the present imperfect, the present perfect,
and the present indefinite (or aorist) ; as in the
indicative the aorist may have two forms, distin-
guished as 1st and 2nd.
Remark 2. The Tense Forms of the subjunc-
tive are the same as those of the indicative, ex-
cept that they have no augment, and that the a
of the 1st aor. and perfect disappears before the
subjunctive terminations.
Remark 3. The personal terminations are the
60 GREEK EXERCISES.
same in all the subjunctive tenses, being those of
the present imperfect indicative, except that the
connecting vowels are long, which is the distin-
guishing characteristic of the forms of the sub-
junctive.
Personal Terminations of the Subjunctive.
1. 2. 3.
Sing. a> ^c p
1. 2. 3.
Plur. wjUEv r}TE (jj<t
In the 2nd and 3rd sing, the eig and ei of the
indie, become riig and rji ; but when the first vowel
of a diphthong, the second of which is i, is length-
ened, the L is always subscript.
Remark 4. The subjunctive is used when the
principal verb is a present or future tense, but it
is never employed in reporting the words of
another person.
I. PRESENT IMPERFECT.
Examples.
of fc> be.
ay-w, ay-cjjU£v,
WfJLSV,
ay-r?c, ay-rjrf.
k,
^T£,
ay-Tfy ay-u)<TL.
^,
WCTl.
CONTRACT VERBS.
1. a absorbs r), and is absorbed by w.
2. € is absorbed into r? and w.
3. o combines with r} to form w ; with y to form
; it is absorbed by w.
GREEK EXERCISES. 73
action already begun, nor in speaking of repeated
or habitual actions. The aor. imperative is very
rarely used in prohibitions.
Do thou then advise us what seems best to you.
Say what you think, sailors. Let them explain
to you their sorrows. Pity me, the unfortunate,
oh brave soldier. Let the slave bid the husband-
men to be present. Take the sword, oh most
faithful friends. Let the captains draw up the
heavy-armed men. Report to the teacher the
reply of the disciple. Come to this city, oh
wisest of physicians. Let the soldiers kill the
prisoners. Expect the severest punishment on
account of thy villanies, oh robber. Leave the
corn in the waggon, ob travellers. Let the
refugees hunt the wild asses in the desert to-
morrow. Learn the Greek language diligently,
oh young men. Oh queen, go to war against
the cruel Thracians. Let the stranger walk
through the beautiful park which is full of lofty
trees. Burn down, oh Athenians, the palace of
the Persian commander.
XXIV. — Infinitives.
Remark 1. The infinitive, as its name denotes,
is the form of the verb which is most general in its
signification, having no reference to person or
H
74 GREEK EXERCISES.
mood : it is, in fact,]a neuter abstract substantive.
Hence it is in Greek frequently used with the
article, and may be the subject or object of a
verb, or governed by a preposition, or in any way
in which a noun is governed.
Remark 2. There are four active infinitives :
the imperfect, the perfect, the future, and the
aorist ; the latter has two forms, first and second.
Remark 3. The original suffix of all the in-
finitives was fievaif with the connecting vowel,
e-fxevai. In some forms the syllable jU£ is omitted ;
in others the syllable ai is dropped and cjutv
contracted into eiv.
Remark 4. In the exercises on the infinitives,
dependent sentences are to be translated by the
accusative of the subject and the infinitive of the
verb precisely as in Latin.
I. IMPERFECT.
The suflSx is eiv added to the Crude Form, or
where there is one to the increased form. The ter-
minations after contraction are av, ttv, and ovv.
Examples.
Av, \v-£Lv, to loosen, or to be loosening ; Xafx^av,
Xafifdav-eiv ; viKa, vlkclv ; ^tXe, (^nXuv ; ^tjXo,
^r]\ovv. Etvat, infinitive of fc-
This infinitive is used when the action is
spoken of as going on at the same time as the
action expressed by the principal verb, or when a
continued or repeated action is described.
GREEK EXERCISES. 75
The scouts reported that the servants were
labouring diligently. I hear that the more power-
ful king is burning up the villages in the country.
We were about to advise thee to punish the robber.
I thought thaf you were to me both country and
friends and allies. This was another pretext to
Cyrus for assembling* an army. The heralds wish
to leave the camp immediately. The old men
advised the king to ask for the same vessels. I
wish to conquer the enemy. There were no lon-
ger provisions to sell. Xenophon left the half of
the army with the horsemen to guard the camp,
and to seek for the deserters. It is not (possible)
to lead back these Greeks. The interpreter advised
us to let the house. There is a difficulty in mak-
ing war (say, to make war) without the consent
of Cyrus. We conjectured that they were march-
ing. The youth is most skilful both in speaking
and in acting (say, to speak and to act). It is
possible to enrich the city. We will permit you
to take provisions from (say, out of) the country,
and to hunt the wild beasts.
II. FUTURE.
The suffix is eiv added to the tense form of the
future. In verbs ending in X, ju, v, pj the origi-
nal connecting vowel £ (vide p. 30) is contracted
with this suffix.
* Literally, " of the to assemble," the article being dependent
on irpo^aaig.
76 GREEK EXERCISES.
Examples.
i\v, \v-(T-£iv, to be about to loosen ; irpay, 7r/oa5-
uv ; viKay vLKr}-(T-£iv ; aire, air-q-a-eiv ; orjXo,
Sr}X(ji)-(T-eiv ; (TTcX-E-Efv, oTtX-cTv ; vefJL-e-iiv,
vifiuv. E(j£(TOaLy future infinitive of eg.
This infinitive is used when the action spoken
of in the dependent sentence is future in reference
to the action expressed by the principal verb.
We expect that this interpreter will come at
daybreak. Near was the stage where Cyrus
was going to stop. Cyrus and the horsemen
remained two days in the villages, whence they
were about to come to the sea. The merchant
explained that the soldiers would be ready to
make war. Ariaeus swears that he will be an
ally. I expect that the interpreter will not seek
these things speedily, but will delay. The scouts
said that the guides would lead us (to a place)
whence we should have provisions. I suspect
that Cyrus himself will make an expedition
against the king. We said that the horsemen
would conquer the interpreters. I think that they
will join battle with one another. The artist
thinks that the strangers will behold many won-
derful things. He thought to command the whole
country. He said he would not let his farm. The
prisoner hears that the creditor will demand all
his property.
GREEK EXERCISES. 11
III. SECOND AORIST.
The suffix is uv added to the Crude Form.
Examples.
Aaj3, Xaj3-£iy, to take; iiaQ, jxad-uv.
The aorist infinitive is not used when the action
spoken of in the dependent sentence is going on
at the same time as that expressed by the prin-
cipal verb, but when the action itself, not its im-
mediate performance, is spoken of. (Vide Re-
marks on aorist imperative.) As the English
language has no forms for the aorist, the same
word must sometimes be translated by the im-
perfect infinitive and sometimes by the aorist,
according to the meaning.
The generals ordered us to flee to the emi-
nences. The commanders wish to leave the tent.
The interpreters reported that the deserters pelted
the women with stones. The king was going to flee
to the hill. I advise thee to enter the other vessel.
The boys desire to learn the Greek language. It
was possible to catch the bustards. The general
desired to have this rank allotted him. Before
losing (infin.) the cohort, the commander desired
to remain in the country. I desire to instil
eagerness into the army. The father desires to
leave behind great treasures for his children.
The ambassador will order thee to come hither.
H 2
78
GREEK EXERCISES.
We mean to leave guards over the soldiers. The
slave was willing to die for the boy.
IV. FIRST AORIST.
The suffix is t added to the tense form.
Examples,
(TTEiX-a-i, \v-CFa-L, viKTi'da-i, dr}\(jj-<Ta-i.
1. The king ordered them to send ambassadors
to Lacedaemon concerning an alliance. The
commanders did not wish to assemble the people.
Xenophon heard that the herald summoned an
assembly. These historians say that the Corin-
thians made an expedition against the Athenians.
It is possible for thee to save thy father. Cyrus
turned over the country to the Greeks to plunder.
The shepherd reported that Xenias the Arcadian,
and Pasion the Megarian, sailed away. The
enemies were just going to burn up the villages.
It was resolved by (seemed fit to) the generals
to punish the most faithless traitors. The am-
bassadors said that the king's army conquered
the barbarians. It seemed fit to the ambassadors
to sacrifice to Apollo.
2. It seemed fit to the king to distribute the
corn to the more worthy soldiers. I was just going
to send away the vessels to Aegina. It is possible
for us to remain in these villages till evening. We
did not wish to slay the messengers in the island.
He said that the priest shewed him many hidden
GEEEK EXERCISES. 79
things. The messengers will be able to report
things from the king to the Greeks, and things
from the Greeks to the king. It was not possi-
ble to give the signal with the horn. There was
a report that the judge limited the time of the trial.
V. PERFECT.
The sufBx is evai added to the tense form, of
which the final a is dropped.
Examples.
Avf \e-Xv-K-evai, to have loosened; rvrr, re-Tvcp-
svai ; Kpajf Ke-Kpay-Evai ; vtKa, v£-vLKr)-K-evaL ;
driXoj dt-or]X(jj-K-£vai,
Vide Remarks on the Perfect Indicative.
I hear that Xenias the Arcadian, and Pasion
the Megarian, have sailed away. The woman
hears that the others are dead. The ambassadors
report that Cyrus is dead. I find that the boys
themselves have written the letters. We find that
the king has enriched the ambassador. There
was a true report that the soldiers had entered
the villages in the country of the Carduchians.
The impudent citizens consider that the king has
violated his oaths. This priest said that the
cowardly soldiers had fled to the hill. I con-
jecture that the king has sent the same ambas-
sadors to Corinth. The farmer says that he has
sold his more fertile farm. The stranger reported
80 GREEK EXERCISES.
that the very rich merchant had let all his
houses. Cyrus heard that the slaves had got
away. Xenophon heard that the deserters had
conquered.
XXV. — Participles.
Remark 1. There are four active participles;
the imperfect, the perfect, the future, and the
aorist (1st and 2nd).
Remark 2. The participles are declined like
adjectives, and, like them, agree with the sub-
stantives to which they refer, in gender, number,
and case.
Remark 3. The participles are much more
frequently used in Greek than in English ; there
are many Verbs which are always followed by
a participle instead of the infinitive ; and rela-
tive clauses in English are often expressed by
participles in Greek. This is the case with all
the relative clauses in the following exercises.
I. IMPERFECT.
Remark. The imperfect participle is made
by adding ovr to the Crude Form, or the In-
creased Form in verbs which have one. The
word is then declined as a noun of the consonant
declension in the inasc. and neut., the final r
being dropped in the nom. sing., and in the
GREEK EXERCISES.
8i
masc. the o being lengthened.^ In the fern, the
syllable aa is added, and ovraa is softened into
ovoa, which is then declined like OaXaaaa*
Example.
C.F.
\v.
Imperf. Part.
\v-ovT loosening.
M.
F.
N.
M.
F. . N.
)-(i}V
-ov<Ta
-ov.
N.
\v'Ovr(.Q
-ovaai 'Ovra,
-U)V
-ovcra
-ov.
V.
-ovreg
-ov<Jcu -ovTa.
-ovTog
-ovcrrjs
-OVTOQ.
. G.
-OVTWV
-OVCTijJV -OVTOJV.
-OVTl
-ovcry
-OVTl.
D.
-ovai
-ovaaig -ovci.
-ovra
-ovaav
-OV.
A.
-ovraq
'Ovcrag -ovra.
Similarly, ypa(l>ovr, ire/jLTrovT, (pepovr, tikovt,
XeiTTovT, ayyeXovT, ovt, participle of eg, (only the
termination being left.) In the contract verbs
a-ovT becomes ujvt ; i-ovr, ovvt ; o-ovt, ovvt.
Their participles are then declined exactly like the
above example, the nom. sing. masc. always
ending; in wv.
Parysatis was the mother of the reigning Ar-
taxerxes. Cyrus plots against the reigning Ar-
taxerxes. Tissaphernes happened to have (say,
having) the city. Cyrus spun out their hopes
(by) promising. The CiHcian queen herself ad-
mired the splendour of the army as she rode by
(say, riding by) in her chariot. The boats sail
* Vide Remark 2, Exercise XVII.
82 GREEK EXERCISES.
round, no one hindering.* Darius (while) dying,
said these things. I hear that Clearchus is an-
noyed at the present circumstances. Orontes was
evidently (say, evident) conquering. Orontes, a
man related to the king, plots against Cyrus,
We were evidently delaying. You would wonder
at the folly of those who demand the arms.
Behold the man chastising the bad boy. If the
scouts were to see the robbers hunting the deer,
they would catch them. The physicians benefited
the women who were ill. Let the generals put a
stop to the soldiers laughing. Some boys never
cease talking. These damsels will leave off prac-
tising dancing. Cyrus was evidently wondering.
I will come with all the commanders, the king
being willing. There is a difficulty in remaining
(say, to remain), the king being unwilling. I
suspect that the accuser (say, the (person) ac-
cusing) is Menon. With those of the women
present I will come into the house speedily.
II. FUTURE.
Remark. The suffix is ovr, as in the imper-
fect, added to the Tense Form. In the liquid
verbs the connecting vowel £ of the Tense Form
contracts with the o, making ov.
* Genitive. In Latin the ablative is the case used absolutely,
i. e. independently of other words in the sentence ; in Greek the
genitive is the case so used.
GREEK EXERCISES. 83
Examples.
\v fut. T. F. \v-(T fut. part. \v-(t-ovt (M.&N.) \v-ff-ovffa (F.)
(TTiX „ (TTs\-€ „ (TTSX-OVVT „ OTeX-OVffa „
The future participle is declined exactly like
the imperfect.
The future participle is used to express a pur-
pose or intention, which in English is often ex-
pressed by the infinitive.
The same messengers came to say these things.
I heard that the general did these things with the
intention* of plotting against the king. The king
came with the intention of sending a herald to
the Greeks. Cyrus sends another to demand the
arms. Clearchus marched slowly, intending to
delay five days on the road. There will be no
one who will conquer the king. We had sent
away the more faithful scouts to lead you back
into Europe. There will be no one who will fur-
nish a market to us. The commander suspected
that the ambassador came with the intention of
making terms with those of the opposite faction.
I myself will send some one to explain these
things to the king. The king sent some one to
give the signal with the horn. The queens are
come with the intention of remaining in the same
tent. The women are come to clear the land.
* * With the intention of,' &c. wg, with the participle.
84 GREEK EXERCISES.
The Corinthians are delaying in the country,
with the intention of burning up the villages.
III. SECOND AORIST.
Remark. The second aorist participle is made
by adding 6vt to the Crude Form.
Ea^ample.
C. F. XtTT, aor. part. \nr-6vT, having left.
It is declined exactly like the imperfect.
The aorist participles are past participles. The
difference between them and the perfect parti-
ciple is the same as that between the aorist and
pres. perfect indie. Vide Remarks on those tenses.
Having fled from the city, the mother came to
the king. Having escaped the notice of the
guide, the generals were hastening to the emi-
nences. Afterwards (say, after these things), at
Cyrus's order (say, Cyrus ordering), having taken
Orontes by the girdle* for death, they led him
out. Having thrown away the gold, these slaves
ran to the deeper river. The citizens, having left
the city, sought for the footsteps of the horses.
Thosef out of the market-place, having left their
wares, were assigning their shares by lot. The
Greeks, having met the ambassadors, came in a
fit of laughter (say, with laughter) to the tents.
* Expressed by the genitive. f Article.
GREEK EXERCISES. 6 1
Examples.
VIKCJ,
viK(t)fiev,
aiTiOy
aiTOJfieVj
SrjXuj,
dr]\(jJiJLSv,
VlK(fQ,
VlKUTEy
airyg,
airr/Tf,
dljXoLQj
drjXiore,
VlK(f,
viKhJcn.
airy,
aiTixxji.
dr]\oi,
dt]\<jt)(n.
This tense is used when the action is spoken of
as unfinished^ continuing, or habitual.
I will come that I may see what you are do-
ing. If the soldiers remain, the queen will give
them provisions. We are going away that we
may dwell safely in the city. If ye have any
thing, ye will not ask for more (plur.). The
herald says this, in order that the clever artist
may work without intermission. The gardener
is at a loss what he is to do. The messenger
is here, in order that we may examine this
affair. The philosopher has taught the boy, in
order that he may be more happy. The master will
do whatever^ seems fit to him. I have sent a
letter to you that ye may be present. Whilst
the advocate is speaking the jurymen will be silent.
The rear-guard will watch while the rest of the
army is sleeping. The travellers will remain in
the cave until the robbers are sailing away. While
* Translate " what " by the neut plur. relative pronoun. Re-
lative words when used with the subjunctive are generally followed
by the particle av. Sometimes av is compounded with relative
adverbs, as orav from ots ' when,' eiretdav from ETreidrj ' when ;*
and these compounds can be used only with the subjunctive mood.
6
62 GREEK EXERCISES.
the physicians are disputing, the old man will
perhaps die.
II. PRESENT PERFECT.*
Examples,
\t-\v-K-iiiy \e-\v-K-u)iiev, i ve-viKTf-K-u), ve-vLKtf-K-tjjvev,
Xe-Xv-K-yg, Xe-Xv-K-tjTS, I v€-viKtj-K-yg, ve-viKjj-K-jjre,
Xi-Xv-K-y, Xs-Xv-K-lO<Tl. ! Vf.-VlK1]-K-y, Ve-VIK1]-K-<JJ<TI.
St-difXw-K-oj, ^e-^j]X(i)-K-(i)fieVy
d£-CT]X0J-K-yQ, f€-^?/Xw-ic-?jr€,
de-dijXoj-K'y, ^£-^?/Xa>-ic-to<Ti.
As in the indicative, this tense is used in speak-
ing of an action which has taken place in past time,
but the results of which still exist — " in the per-
fect the chief regard is paid to the permanence of
the consequence of an action."
If you have done this before I return I will
give you much gold. If the thieves should be
dead the slaves will bury them. When the
young man has written this letter, he will hasten
away from the city. The physicians will remain
until they have purified the city. The gardener
will work until he has planted the trees in the
garden. These very foolish sailors will not
escape unpunished, if they have injured the state.
Unless he has carved the statue, the artist will
not come to-morrow. The masters will not shut
* This tense is often made of the perfect participle with the
subjunctive of the verb eg ; as T€Tv<pojg w.
GREEK EXERCISES. 63
the book before they have explained the discourse
to the pupils.
II. AORISTS (i.e. INDEFINITE PRESENTS).
Ea^amples.
2nd Aorist. 1st Aorist.
\a(S-(t), Xa(3-(i}iitVf
j3Xaip-u), ^\a\p-u)fievj
\aj3-ygj Xa/S-j^re,
(SXarp-yg^ (3Xa\p-TjTS,
Xa/3-y, Xa^-ioai.
jSXail^-y, ^Xa-^-(o(Ti.
1st Aorist.
aiTTi-ff-b) aiTTi-cr-ijjfieVj
aiTii'<T-yg, airrj-ff-rjTS,
aiTt]-(T-y^
aiTrj-ff-aKTi.
The aorist is used in speaking of an action
regarded as momentary and complete. The aor.
subj. is frequently equivalent to the Latin present
perfect subj. It is also used instead of the impe-
rative in prohibitions, when the act regarded as
future is wholly forbidden, and in doubting
questions, in the 1st person.
If Ariaeus come hither, we will place him upon
the kingly throne. We will tell in Greece what-
ever (plur.) you may advise. When the-signal-is-
given the scouts will do so. Whither shall I flee-
from this wild boar? If the travellers send away
the rowers, they will not return until night. Do
not talk much (i. e. many things), oh boys ! The
queen herself has called together the generals that
they may advise her. The robber will not kill the
64 GREEK EXERCISES.
man, lest the judge should punish him. I make
that inquiry, in order that the old man may not re-
main here. Shall we approach the house ? The
islanders will certainly wage war against the
Phrygians if they burn down their villages. The
soldiers are running as fast as possible* in order
that they may catch the deserters. The hus-
bandmen will be here that the boys may learn
agriculture. Do not come while I am here.
The heralds will remain until the exiles leave the
country.
XXII. — Tenses of the Optative.
Remark 1. There are four tenses in this
mood. The past imperfect, the past perfect
(these are usually called the present and perfect),
the past indefinite (or aorist 1st and 2nd), and
the future.
Remark 2. The tense forms of the Optative
are the same as those of the indicative, except
that they have no augment.
Remark 3. The characteristic of the Opta-
tive tenses is the diphthong oi, except in the 1st
aorist, which has only the vowel i, coalescing
with the a of the Tense Form into the diphthong
* Such expressions as this are to be translated by the super-
lative with the particles wg, on, or ottw^.
GREEK EXERCISES.
65
Remark 4. The personal endings are the fol-
lowing.
1. 2. 3.
Sing. fuLi, g, None
1. 2. 3.
Plur. fievf r£, sv.
Remark 5. The optative is used when the
principal verb is a past tense, and in some kinds
of hypothetical sentences.
I.
PAST IMPERFECT.
Ea^amples.
ay-oi-fxi,
ay-oi-ju6v,
ti-TjVj si-Tjfi(v,'\ of 6e, * be,' conjugated
ay-oi-Sy
ay-oi-re,
ei-T]Qy ti-T/re, V in a manner diiferent
ay-oi,
ay-oi-ev.
Ei-r], ei-r)(Tav,j from the active verb.
CONTRACT VERBS.
1 . a combines with oi to form c^.
2. £
Jf
» <
01.
3.
Jf
Examples*
01.
vtjcy/ti,
VlKl^fiSVj
aiToifiiy aiTOLfiev,
dijXoLfxi,
driXoifxev,
vi/cye,
vi/c<^re,
aLTOlQ, aiTOlTt,
dT]\oig,
St]\olt(:,
VlK</>,
VlKi^lV.
aLTOi, aiTouv.
di]\oi,
dr}\ouv.
This tense is used when the action is spoken
of as unfinished, continuing, or habitual.
The messengers said that Ariaeus was waiting
for the Greeks. We heard from the deserter
* In these verbs, the Attic dialect generally has the following
terminations in the singular, instead of those here given : tjv,
nQy V'
G 2
66 GREEK EXERCISES.
that ye were conquering those opposed to you.
The soldiers were afraid that* the enemy were
leading the bowmen against the left wing. The
thieves were wondering that the master did not
call the servant. The same scout went to the city
that he might remain there with the merchant.
We were in the tower in order that we might
observe the army. The workmen had inquired
what else they were to do. The very impudent
boys said that they hoped for many good things
from the traveller. The physicians themselves
considered that the mother of the child was very
ill. You conjectured that the swifter vessels
were sailing away beyond the harbour. If the
Thracians were to wage war, they would greatly
injure the Athenians.^ The heavy-armed men
used to guard while the right wing was sleeping.
The judge himself said that he was waitmg while
they cut down the bridge. If you were to behold
Athens, you would greatly admire the beauty of
that city.
* When the principal sentence implies fear, solicitude, or
uncertainty, iiri is used instead of on to connect the dependent
sentence.
•f" In this and other sentences of the same kind the particle av
must be used with the verb in the second or consequent clause.
Its use is to shew that the sentence relates to something merely
supposed, not to what has actually happened. Its position is
either immediately before or immediately after the verb.
GREEK EXERCISES. 67
II. PAST PERFECT.
Examples.*
re-rax-oi-ni, re-Tax-oi-fxev,
yTr]'K-oi-fii, yTr]-K-oi-fiev,
re-Tax-oi-g, Tt-rax-oi-re,
yTTj-K-oi-g, yrrj-K-oi-TS,
TE-rax-oi, Te-rax-oi-ev.
7jTr]-K-0L, yTr]-K-oi-ev.f
Vide Remark on the Perfect Conjunctive.
The boy said that he had written the letter.
The generals of the Greeks themselves heard that
Cyrus vv^as dead. The citizens said that the
robber had murdered the shepherd. The cap-
tain inquired whether the soldiers had done all
the work. The scouts reported that you had
dug the longer ditch. This teacher used to talk
until he had fully explained the rule. The father
said that the physicians had cured his son. The
queen was inquiring whether the husbandmen
had planted the palm-trees upon the mountains.
The master suspected that the servant had not
collected all the goats.
III. AORISTS.
Ea^amples.
2nd Aorist. 1st Aorist.
Xaf^-oi-fxi, Xa(3-oi-[iev,
\a/3-oi-c, Xaj3-oi-re,
Xaj3-oi, \a(3-oi-ev.
TTSfitpa-i-fii, Treix'^a-i-fiev,
TTifi-'^a-ij 7rsfi'<pa-i-£v.
* The terminations of the singular are also rjv, rjg, r}.
t Although the forms here set down do occur in the Greek
writers, yet the perfect optative is usually expressed by the per-
fect participle and the optative of eg.
68 GREEK EXERCISES.
1st Aorist.
Troir}-(Ta-
■i-fii,
, TTOITJ-
aa-i-fitVy
TTOirj-aa-
•'-e>
TTOLT]-
■aa-
•I.T6,
TTOlt)-
■(Ta-
h
TTOll)-
■(xa-
■i-ev.
In the 1st aorist the forms more commonly
used for the 2nd and 3rd person sing, and the 3rd
person plur. end in eiag, ete, nav ; as, woir)(T£tagj
Troir}(T£is, TTOiriaeiav. These forms are sometimes
called the Aeolic aorist.
Vide Remark on Subjunctive Aorist.
One of the attendants summoned him, in order
that he might see the sacrifices. The eldest of
the Greeks said that they would sooner die than
be slaves. We had sent away the messengers
in order that they might seek for the strangers.
If you should hear the lion, you would hasten
into the house. The traitor said that we concealed
him in the upper-chamber. I came that I might
hinder the march as much as possible. The
farmer brought the same birds into the market-
place that the shopkeepers might buy them. If
the army were to remain until to-morrow it would
receive the month's pay. If the barbarians should
conquer us, they would certainly kill even the
women and children. The rich man wondered
that the base flatterer praised his horses. These
very industrious colonists would soon clear the
land. If the huntsmen were to destroy all the
foxes, they would greatly benefit this country.
GREEK EXERCISES. 69
The steward had hired the woodmen that they
might cut down the lofty trees which were near
the house. If the ships were to sail away we
should never see them again.
ra^-oi, Ta^-oi-ev.
aiTij-(T-oi-fii, aLTTi-ff-oi-fieVj
aiTT]-(T-oi-g, aiTT]-(r-oi-re,
aiTr]-(T-oi, aiTT}-(T-oi-ev.
IV. FUTURE.
Examples.
fxev-oX-fjii, fxev-oT-jxev,
jl(.V-0l-Q, fiev-ol-TE,
fiev-oX, fi£V'0T-£v.
e<T-oi-o, la-oi-aQe, > ,
ta-Ol-TO. t<J-Ol-VTO. J
The fut. opt. of verbs ending in X, ju, v, p, and
not having an increased form, is the same in form
as the imperfect opt., except that, as shewn above,
it has the circumflex accent, which arises from
the £, originally used as the connecting vowel,
coalescing with the diphthong of the termination.
(Vide Remark 2, Exerc. XV.)^
The fut. opt. is used only when a sentence con-
taining the future is reported, and made subordi-
nate to a verb in a past tense, which is called the
ohliqua oratioy or indirect form of expression.
We asked him whether he would do this. The
* In the Attic dialect the fut. opt. of these verbs has the same
terminations in the singular as the past imperf. opt. of contract
verbs. (Vide note on that tense.)
70 GREEK EXERCISES.
workman did not signify what he would require.
The judge suspected that the jurymen would not
remain in the tent. The Greeks were wondering
whether ye would come. The scouts reported that
the general would lead his own army into winter
quarters. The crowd of women heard that the
queen's chariot would not be safe. The Corin-
thians suspected that ye would not wage war.
Did the traitor say that I would send away my
most useful servant, and leave him alone in the
house? The deserters reported that we would
advise them. The cowardly trumpeter said that
he would kill the wolf.
XXIII. — Imperative Mood.
Remark 1. There are three tenses in this
mood ; the imperfect, the perfect, and the aorist.
Remark 2. The Tense Forms of the impera-
tive are the same as those of the indicative, ex-
cept that they have no augment.
Remark 3. There is no form for the 1st per-
son, either singular or plural, in the imperative.
Remark 4. The personal endings were origi-
nally —
2. 3. I 2. 3.
Sing. e-9i, s-T(t) I Plur. c-re, o-vtojv, or e-ruxrav.
But in the ordinary active verbs the ending of
the 2nd sing, is dropped ; and in the 1st aor.
the termination ov is substituted for a-Oi.
GREEK EXERCISES. 71
Remark 5, In the active voice the perfect
imperative is found of those verbs only in w^hich
the present perfect is used with the signification
of a present imperfect ; and as these verbs are
few in number, no exercise upon that tense will
be given. It may be stated, however, that it re-
tains the original ending of the 2nd person sin-
gular.
I. IMPERFECT.
Examples.
(TTtW-f-rw,
OTcXX-c-re/
aTe\X-o-vT(t)Vj or
(TTtW-s-Toxrav.
io-9iy e(T-rs, "j
£<r-rw, eff-TtaaaVf J' of eg, be.
CONTRACT VERBS.
viKa,
VlKa-T£,
airei, airei-rs,
VlKa-TO),
viK(t)-vT(t)v, or
atr£t-rw, atrov-vTiov, or
viKu-Tuxrav.
aiTsi-Tojffav.
drjXov
, drjXot
-T
->
rwv, or driXov-Tb)(Tav.
The distinction between the present imperfect
and the aorist imperative cannot be expressed
by mere translation into English, as we have only
one form for the imperative ; nor is it always easy
to shew wherein it consists. Generally, how-
ever, the present is used in commanding when
emphasis is laid on the progress of the action, or
when its continued performance is enjoined ; and
in prohibitions, when an actually present or ha-
bitual action is forbidden.
72 GREEK EXERCISES.
Do not talk so fast, children. Send away the
scouts to the sea-shore every day. Let the gar-
dener cut down as many cherry-trees as possible.
Report these things from us to the king, oh
messengers. Let them do whatsoever seems
fit to them. Depart, for here thou art no
longer safe. Let him insult us, we care not
for his words. Explain these things to me
more plainly. Do not wrong the unfortunate
man thus. Oh children, leave the house of the
most faithless man. Let the herald ask the Greeks
for their arms. Save the provisions, oh foolish
(people). Retire thou within the tower, young
man. Farewell, plans of the wise ! Flee ! flee,
Medea, from this dangerous land. Tell me how
they advised you. Unfasten the bolts, atten-
dants. Let the citizen himself say whether he
hopes for any thing.
II. AOR
ISTS.
Examples.
Xa/3-£,
\af3-e-Ts,
7refi\p-ov,
7rf/zi|/-a-r£,
\a/3-£-rw,
XajS-o-vTiov,
TTi^-^-a-TW,
Trefi\p-a-vT(A)Vf or
or \a(3-e-T(jj(Tav.
7re^ip-a-T(i)(Tav.
aiTTj-a-oVj
aiT-q-aa-TEj
(TTeiX-ov,
(jTiCK-a-re,
aiTri-aa-Tojy
aiTr]-(Ta-vT(i)v, or
(Trei\-a-T(x),
(TTeiX-a-vT(i)v,or
aiTTj-aa-Tuxrav.
oTfiX-a-rtixrav.
The aorist imperative is used when the per-'
formance of the action, not its time, is the point
on which emphasis is laid. Hence it is not
employed in commanding the continuance of an
GREEK EXERCISES. 85
The Cilician woman, having seen the splendour
and discipline of the array, wondered. Cyrus
ordered Aristippus, having led back^ these men,
to come to the city. Xenias, having killed those
from (say, out of) the cities, came to Sardis.
Cyrus ordered the youngest damsel to come and
say this.f The generals order the ladies to come
and see these things. f Having learnt the pro-
ceedingsj there, the commanders rode away.
Having come to the market-place, the soldiers
bought the provisions.
IV. FIRST AORIST.
Remark. This participle is made by adding
VT to the Tense Form. Hence the aorist parti-
ciple of \v is \v-(Ta'VT, and of areX, aTsiX-a-vT.
The VT are dropped and the a lengthened
before the suffix o- in the sing. nom. masc,
and before the suffix (ra of the feminine. In
the neut. nom. sing, (no case-ending being
added in the neut.) the r is dropped, and the
a is short. In the dat. plur. masc. and neut. the
VT are dropped before the suffix m.
* ** Having led back " may either agree with Aristippus in the
dative, or it may be in the accusative, as is common before a
verb in the infinitive.
t In these sentences the former infinitive must be translated by
the participle, and the conjunction will consequently be omitted.
X Art. neut. plur.
I
86 GREEK EXERCISES.
Example.
C. F. \v. Aor. Part. Xv-aa-vr, having loosened.
M. F. N. M. F. N.
Xv-crdc -adaa -crav N. Xv-cavTsg -(racrai -aavra.
-(Tag -(Ta(Ta -aav V. 'travTsg -aaaat -travTa.
-aavTog -craerig -aavrog G. -aavTiov -(raaojv -aavTMv.
-aavTi -(xaa-g -aavTi D. -caai -traaaig -(xaai.
-aavTa -aaaav -crav A. -aavrag -(racrag -aavra.
Similarly, '7rEfM\pavTy jpaipavTf vofiiaavT, juLsivavT,
VEifiavT, ayjEiXavTy viKricravr, airriaravT.
The adjective Travr ' all/ is declined in the same
way as this participle.
On hearing (having heard) these things, the
chosen (men) report to the soldiers. The chosen
men reported all the things which seemed fit* to
the army. Having collected an army, Cyrus
made war on the Thracians. Having thrown
away the tunics, they ran into the tent. The
brothers of the women who had remained expected
great (much) good fortune. Having incurred
danger in the village, the women went away.
The friends of those who had pursued were soon
tired. Having persuaded me, you received pledges
from me. Having done these things, all the
youths went away. Having remained five days
in the country, the sisters sold the farm. Having
distributed the rest of the corn to the soldiers,
* Neut. art. with participle.
GREEK EXERCISES. 87
the general rode away as quickly as possible.
The youth came with those who had killed the
messenger. To the soldiers when they have con-
quered I will give many rewards.
V. PERFECT PARTICIPLE.
Remark. This participle is made from the
tense form of the perfect after dropping the final
«, by adding or for the masculine and neuter,
and via for the feminine.
The r of the masculine and neuter Crude Form
becomes g in the nominative singular, because r
cannot stand at the end of a word. In the mas-
culine nominative the o becomes w.
The r in the dative plural is lost before o-, as
usual. . -
The feminine is declined regularly like nouns
in a.
Example.
C. F. Xu. Perf. Part. \e-\vKOT, having loosened.
M. F. ' N. -■ -'^. M. F. N.
\£-\vK-(t}g -via -og. - N. . Xe-XvK-Greg -viai -ora.
-(og -via -og. "V". -oreg -viai -ora. ,
-orog -viag -OTogi G.'- -ot(jjv -viojv -otujv.
-oTi -via -on.. ' .D,. -ocri -viaig -oai.
-ora -viav -og. . J^. ., -orag -viag -ora.
Similarly, /3f]3ovX€VKGT, yey^oa^or, 7r£7ro/^^or,
TTETrrwKor, veviKrjKor, rjfnKOTf TrecjiiXrjicoT,
I, hear that Cyrus, is dead. The Egyptians
88 GREEK EXERCISES.
used to embalm the dead.''*' The guides sent those
who had fled out of the city into the plain.
Those who had conquered came into the tents
with the women and the children. Cyrus will
restore those who have been expelled. We hear
that the general has fallen. The strangers are
aware that the father has taught the youth these
things. The shepherds rejoiced that the Thracians
had punishedf the robbers. Xenpphon heard
that the messengers had sailed away. The stew-
ard brought in the boy who had written the let-
ters. (It) is disgraceful for him not to entertain
you, who have done these things. It is disgrace-
ful for thee, who hast ordered these things, to
speak thus. Ye heard that the sister was dead.
I am conscious of having wronged you.
PASSIVE AND MIDDLE VOICE.
General Memarks,
Remark 1. In most of the tenses the same
forms serve both for the passive and the middle
voice ; the only exceptions being the aorists and
the future. Each voice has an aorist peculiar to
itself ; and the passive has two futures which do
not belong to the middle ; but what is usually
* Perf. part. f Use 6ti with perf. part, and riaav.
GREEK EXERCISES. 89
called the middle future has sometimes the signi-
fication of the passive. Where the same forms
belong to both voices, they will be taken toge-
ther in the following exercises.
Remark 2. The verb is said to be in the
middle voice when it expresses — 1st, an action
done by the agent upon himself; 2nd, an action
done by the agent for his own benefit ; or 3rd,
an action which the agent procures to be done
for his own benefit. Many verbs, however, are
found in the middle form only, having neither
the active nor the passive voice ; and some of
these have the ordinary transitive meaning, but
most of them are intransitive ; they are, in fact,
of the same kind as the deponent verbs in Latin.
Another class of these deponent verbs have their
aorists of the passive form ; and transitive de-
ponents very commonly have tenses which are
passive both in form and signification.
Remark 3. The direct reflective meaning (1st
in Rem. 2) is found in very few verbs ; the middle
forms more frequently having a transitive or in-
transitive signification, equivalent to a new simple
meaning.
Remark 4. The rules already given respect-
ing the contraction of vowels, the changes of con-
sonants, the augments, &c., and the remarks on
the use of the tenses and moods, apply, of course,
to all the voices, and consequently will not be re-
peated.
I 2
90 GREEK EXERCISES.
TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.
XXVI. — Present.
Remark. This tense is made by adding the
following terminations to the Crude Form, or,
where there is one, to the Increased Form.
o-iuLai 1. o-/xeOa,
(a-<Tai, saij) rj or €i* 2. z-aOe.
e-Tai 3. o-vTai,
Examples,
C.F. \v.
\v-o-fiai I am being loosened, Xv-o-fxsQaWe are being
loosened,
\v-{e-<Tai, tai,) y Thou art being Xv-t-oQe Ye are being
loosened. loosened.
\v-i-Tai He is being loosened, Xv-o-vrai They are being
loosened.
C.F. rVTT. I.F. TVTTT.
TVTTT-o-fiai, TVTrr-o-fieOay
ri»7rr-(e-(rai,£ai,)y, TVTTT-e-irOe,
rvTTT-e-Tai,
TVTTT-OV-Tai.
C.F. VIKU.
j/iK(a-6<Tai,a£ai)^, viKa-aOsy
viKa-rai, viKOJ-vTai.
C.F. (piXe love.
(piXov-fjiai, (piKov-fieOaj
0i\(£-£(Tai, eeat)ei, 0i\ei-(T0£,
(piXsL-Tai, (piXoV'VTai,
C.F. fiiffOo hire.
fiiaOov-fiai, fiKrOov-fieOaf
fiL<T9{o-£(Tai,oeai)oif yuaOov-oBij
[iL<r9ov-Tai, fiiffOov-vrai.
* El was only the colloquial Attic form, which, however, was
always used with the verbs (SovX ' wish,' oi ' think,' and in the
future of OTT 'see.' Many modern editors have introduced it
into the tragedians, but the MSS. do not warrant this innovation.
GREEK EXERCISES. 91
I. PASSIVE,
I am being sent by the king himself. Thou art
being hired by Cyrus. The guide is being sent by
the general to Laurion in Attica. We are being
led to death. Ye are being sought for. The ox is
being sacrificed on the eminences. It is said
that the generals have done all these things
in the plain. It is said that Cyrus made an
expedition against Artaxerxes. It is said that
the enemies will come at daybreak. The boys
are being brought up at the court of Croesus.
Ye are being turned to flight by the enemies.
The letters are being brought into the tent.
These men are said to be among the best of the
Greeks. The arms are demanded from the pri-
soners. I am being struck by the soldier. Thou
art being conquered by the messenger. Ye are
being left by us. The dead are being buried in
the plain. As many Greeks as possible are being
drawn up for battle. It is conjectured that about
three thousand heavy-armed joined in the expe-
dition with him. It is conjectured to be the track
of about two thousand camels. The soldiers are
assembling into the plain of Castolus. The foxes are
being hunted. The idle boys are being punished.
The beautiful country is being made bare of trees.
We are conquered by the satrap. The generals
are enraged on account of the loss of the soldiers.
I am enraged with thee. The general is wounded
92 GREEK EXERCISES.
in the thigh. An innumerable army is collecting
by Xerxes. The city is taking. The soldiers are
praised for their courage.
II. MIDDLE.
Cyrus marches through Phrygia. We are
going before into Cilicia. I wish to do all these
things. Not all judges consult without anger.
You wish to fare well. The young men fight
boldly for their country. The Lacedaemonians
march to the sound of (say, with) flutes. This
shopkeeper tells a lie. The citizens obey the
laws. The skilful physicians heal the severe
wounds. We choose peace in preference to war.
The king hires the impudent barber's son. Ye
arrive at the first stage about midnight.* The
traitors are rushing forward as eagerly as pos-
sible. Having heard these things, the king makes
counter-preparations. Cyrus is consulting with
Clearchus (dat.). The king begins the war. Cyrus
sends for the herald and the interpreter. Good
citizens follow the laws. The soldiers pack up
their baggage.
XXVII. — Future Imperfect.
Remark. This tense is made by adding a to
the Crude Form, and affixing the same endings
as in the present.
* Plural.
GREEK EXERCISES.
93
The future imperfect is generally called the
Middle Future ; but it is often used in the Attic
dialect in the passive signification.
Examples.
C.F. 0i; 'sacrifice,' Pass. Fut. T.F. eva.
Ov-ff-o-fxai
9v-(X-{e-(Tai,e-aL)
Ov-a-i-rai
Qv-a-o-fxiQa
9v-(T-e-cr9e
Qv-a-o-vrai
I shall be sacrificed,
Thou wilt be sacrificed,
He wiU be sacrificed,
"We shall be sacrificed,
Ye will be sacrificed,
They wiU be sacrificed.
C.F. /SouXtu * deliberate,' Mid. Fut. T.F. BovXev-cr.
Pov\ev-<T-o-fiai I shall deUberate,
/3ov\€v-(r(c-(rai, fat), y Thou wilt deliberate,
jSovXeu-ff-c-rat He will deUberate,
(3ov\ev-ff-o-fi€9a We shall deliberate,
(3ov\ev-(r-e-(T96
fiov\ev-(r-o-vTai
Ye will deliberate,
They wiU deliberate.
I. PASSIVE.
The oxen will be sacrificed by the priest on
the eminences. The boys will be brought up
at the court of the king. It will be said that
the king is cruel. We shall be ensnared by
the enemies. Ye will be freed from fear and
anxiety. I shall be honoured by the rulers of
the state. The women will be benefited by the
labours of their children. The Athenians will be
thrown into confusion by one another.
94 GREEK EXERCISES.
11. MIDDLE.
We shall lead this army. The judges will con-
sult without anger. The youths will fight boldly
for their country. Having heard these things,
the king will hire a large army. We shall
follow with Cyrus, no one hindering (gen. abs.).
Thou wilt encamp near the bridge. The soldiers
will pack up their baggage. The islanders will
turn to piracy. Ye will cease running. Ye will
choose honour and liberty. Thou shalt taste of
honours. Before the work I shall deliberate
welL The good citizens will cheerfully obey the
laws. The horsemen will not perceive the plot
against them (say, the against them plot). I will
send for the satrap from his government. The
Lacedaemonians will march to the sound of
flutes.
XXVIII. — Future Indefinite Passive.
Remark 1. This tense is made in two ways,
which are commonly distinguished as 1st and 2nd.
1st, By adding Orjcr to the Crude Form : the
future of contract verbs is made in this way,
the vowel being lengthened as in the fut. act.
When this suffix is added to a verb endings
in an unaspirated labial or guttural, the final
consonant is changed into the corresponding
aspirate : thus tt or /3 becomes ; 7 or k be-
comes x'j ^j "^f ^^^ ^j before d become a.
GREEK EXERCISES. 95
2nd, By adding »](r to the Crude Form.
In both futures the person-endings are the same
as in the present tense.
The suffixes of these futures evidently connect
them with the passive aorists (vide Exerc. xxx.) ;
and in signification also they are analogous to
the aorist ; for which reason they are here called
"indefinite."
Some verbs have both the 1st and the 2nd
future, but most verbs have only one of them.
Remark 2. The 1st fut. is made from the
Long Form, if there is one (vide p. 24) ; the 2nd
fut. from the short one : e. g. Xiw, Long Form
XaTr; 1st fut. X£t^-0»jo- ; EK-TrXay, Long Form ek-
irX-qjf 2nd fut. EK-TrXay-rjo".
Remark 3. The Crude Form is subject to the
following changes in the futures.
1. £ in monosyllabic roots ending in a liquid is
changed into a: e.g. tev, 1st fut. ra-^rjo-: oreX,
2nd fut. (TToX-TjCT, (vide p. 54).
2. £ preceded by p is changed into a in the 2nd
fut. : e. g. TpETTj Tpa7r-r}cr ; arpEtp, (Trpa<p-r](T.
3. (T is frequently inserted before the suffix of
the 1st fut. ; chiefly when the Crude Forms end in
the diphthongs av, £u, or ov : e. g. Qpav, Opav-a-
-Or](T j keXev, KsXev-a-6r}(y ; aKOv, aKOV-(T'0r]<T,
Example.
C. F. XtTT leave. Fut. T. F. \H(l>-Or](y.
\H<p-9r](T-oiiai I shall be left,
XtL(}>-Or](x-(£-(Tai, e-ai) y Thou wilt be left,
\eif-9ri(T-e-Tai He will be left,
96 GREEK EXERCISES.
\H<l>.er)<T.o-fie9a We shaU be left,
X£i^.07j(T.£-(T0f Ye will be left,
\ei(p.eri(r-o-vTai They will be left.
Similarly, C. F. Xitt, Fut. T. F. XiTr-ncr: C.F.
rpsir, Fut. T. F. r/oaTT-Tjor.
Remark 4. The word avep 'a man/ has a
peculiarity in its declension, owing to the elision
of the short vowel e. For example, avepog be-
comes av>oc, and the thin dental (S) is inserted
for euphony. Hence avepog, &c.
avnp. N. {avepeg, avpeg,) avdptg.
avep. V. {avtpsg, avpeg,) avdpeg.
{avepog, av'pog,) avepog. G. {avepiov, avpujv,) avSpcov.
(avepi, av'pi,) avSpu D. (avepm, av'pam,) avdpam.
(avepa, av'pa,) avdpa. A. (avepag, avpag,) avdpag.
Note. The same change of the vowel in the
dative plural occurs in irarep 'father,' dative
plural irarpa-cTi ; in fivrep ' mother,' dative plural
fivrpa-m; and in Ovyarsp 'daughter,' dative
plural Ovyarpa-m. These three nouns also throw
away e in the genitive and dative singular.
1. The soldiers will be left in the plain with
the sailors. We shall be left by the generals and
captains. The horses will be led into the same
plain. The partridges will be pursued by the
horses. I shall be compelled by them to do these
things. After this (pi.) thou wilt be compelled to ^
come. These things will be made evident by what '
(pi.) I shall do on the next day. We shall be pre-
GREEK EXERCISES. 97
vented from coming^ into the camp. The tracks of
the camels will be sought for by us. The free men
will be prevented from crossing* the very broad
river. The scouts will be deceived by the false de-
serter. We shall not soon be persuaded to come
to terms with those of the opposite faction. Ye
will be chosen ambassadors to Philip. The letters
will be sent immediately to the general. The
fearful horses will be thrown into confusion by
the camels and elephants. The robber will be
punished as severely as possible.
2, The army will be turned to flight. We shall
be left in the plain. The king will be struck
with astonishment. We shall be freed from fear
and anxiety. The army of the king will be
destroyed by the islanders. Ye will be reared in
the same country with us (dat.).
XXIX. — Past Imperfect.
Remark. The past imperfect is made by pre-
fixing the augment, as in the active, and adding
the following terminations to the Crude Form,
or, where there is one, to the Increased Form.
(e-(To, £0,) ou, 2. e-frOe,
^"^0^ 3. o-vro.
* Use genitive of article with imperfect infinitive.
K
98 GREEK EXERCISES.
Examples.
1. C.F. \v. Imp. T.F. £-\v.
i-\v-o-fxrjv I was being loosened,
£-\v-{e-(To, eo,) ov Thou wast being loosened,
e-\v-£-ro He was being loosened,
t-\v-o-ne6a We were being loosened,
e-Xv-s-(T0e Ye were being loosened,
e-Xv-o-vTo They were being loosened.
2. C.F. Tvrr. LF. tvttt. Imp. T.F. e-TviTT.
e-rvTTT-o-firiVf e-rvTrT-o-fieOa,
t-TVTrT-(£-ffo, eo,) ov, t-TVTTT-e-ffOe,
e-TVTTT-t-rOj e-TVTTT-O-VTO,
3. C.F. viKa. T.F. e-viKa. 4. C.F. atj^e praise. T.F, yva.
e-viKio-fiTjv, £-viK(t}-[ie9a, yvov-fiTjv, yvov-fjiiOa,
e-viK(a-e<TO, aeo,) w, i-viKa-adt, yv^e-eao, eeo,) ov, yvei-cOej
e-VLKu-TOf e-viK(t)-vro. yvti-TO, yvov-vro.
5. I.F. iiicQo. T.F. e-fiKrOo.
e-fitcr9ov-iii]v, e-fiKrOov-fieOa,
t-lxi(TO(o-e<To, oeo,) ov, t-jxiadov-<T9ey
t-fii<T9ov-TOy e-fii<j9ov-vro.
I. PASSIVE.
I was deceived by the impudent flatterer. The
general was often hired by the king. We were sent
oftentimes up the mountain. The horses used to
be chosen by you. The guides were compelled to
mount their horses. The fathers were considered
worthy of mjich honour. The dogs used to be
admired by the Greeks. Thou wast brought up
at the court of Croesus. The Grecian army was
still drawing up together. Ye were being led up
to the very steep eminences. Thou wast sent up the
GREEK EXERCISES. 99
mountains. Orontes, a Persian man, and related*
to the king by birth, was said to be among the best
of the Persians in war (afFairs.)t Provisions (say,
the necessary things) were being procured by the
soldiers. These preparations were being made
by the commanders of the barbaric army, (say,
these things were being prepared, &c.) The lion
was being hunted on the mountain. The scents
of the flowers were admired by the sisters. All
the flowers of this island were sought for by the
men. The ten goats were being sacrificed on the
mountains on account of the march. Smoke ap-
peared (say, was shewn) in the villages. Not
many days were spent in the villages. All these
things were reported about Cyrus's army by the
deserters. Orontes was severely punished. In
these stages were beheld the footsteps of horses
and dogs. The Persians were being persuaded
by some one to cross the river Tigres. The boys
were left in the fields. Many of the arms of the
soldiersj were carried on the chariots and beasts
of burden. The letter was being written in-
Egyptian. Thou wast being praised for thy cou-
rage* The barbarians were being conquered.
II. MIDDLE.
The Lacedaemonians marched to the sound of
flutes. Having heard these things, Artaxerxes
* Pres. part. f Plur. ace. neut. of adj.
X May be put in the dative.
100 GREEK EXERCISES.
was promising that he would come. The good
citizens followed the laws. Cyrus sent for the
interpreter and the horseman. More than two
thousand were arriving. The kind physicians
healed the soldier's wound. The Hellespontiac
cities willingly (say, willing) contributed money
to him for the maintenance of the soldiers. Thus
the army was maintained for him in Thessalia.
The very fierce bear attacked the boy. Cyrus and
his brother Artaxerxes communicated together.
The soldiers packed up their baggage and armed
themselves. Thou didst reverence the laws.
Having heard these things, the daughters cheer-
fully obeyed their father. Thou foughtest
bravely for thy country. Ye did not perceive the
plot against the king. We perceived that these
soldiers had passed (perf. part.) over the river,
and were burning up (imperf. part.) the village.
XXX. — Passive Aorists.
Remark. The aorist passive is made from the
Crude Form in two ways, distinguished as 1st
and 2nd.
1st. By adding On' Contract and derivative
verbs have their aorists formed in this way. The
same changes are made in the consonants which
come before the suffix as take place before the
GREEK EXERCISES. lOl
suffix Ori(T of the 1st future passive. Vide page
94.
2ndly. By adding ??.
In both ways the augment is prefixed, and the
following person-endings added.
V
1.
jU£V.
C
2.
re.
«
3.
(Tav.
Example.
C. F. \v. Aor. T. F. E-Xv-Or].
e-\v-9rj-v I was loosened, €-Xv-9r}-fiev We were loosened,
e-Xv-Orj-g Thou wast loosened, £-Xv-9r)-Te Ye were loosened,
e-Xv-9r) He was loosened. e-Xv-9T]-<Tav They were loos-
ened.
Similarly, C.F.t/oett Hurn;' Aor. T. F. e-rpair-rj.
C. F. viKa ; Aor. T. F. e-viKYiSri. C. F. ^rtXo ; Aor.
T. F. e-dr}Xw-9r},
Some verbs have aorists formed in both ways,
but most verbs have only one of them. Verbs
which have a 2nd aorist active very rarely have a
2nd aorist passive.
Remark 2. Remarks 2 and 3 on the Future
Indefinite Passive (p. 95) apply without any
modification to the passive aorists, the 1st aorist
being substituted in them for the 1st future, the
2nd aorist for the 2nd future.
Remark 3. Those verbs which have the 1st
future, have also the 1st aorist ; those which have
the 2nd future, have the 2nd aorist.
k 2
102 GREEK EXERCISES.
1. Thou wast praised by thy father for thy
good disposition. The slave was left in the rob-
bers' cave. We were shot at by some one of the
bowmen. Ye were drawn up as if for battle in
the plain. The generals were wounded through
the breastplate. Cyrus was said to be the most
fond of horses of all his equals-in-age. Cyrus
was declared general of all, as many as were as-
sembled to the plain of Castolus. The soldiers
were compelled to mount their horses in the park.
The general's property was registered in that
village. The country was given to him as a gift
by the king. The boys were all taught to write
letters in- Greek. The letters were written both
in-Egyptian and in-Persian. Thus Cyrus was
led out to pursue the barbarians. Of those who
crossed^ the river not one was wetted higher
than the breasts by the river. On hearingf these
things Cyrus was pleased. The sea-fight was
reported to the king by those who had been ba-
nished. J This man was considered more worthy
to be general than the generals themselves.
All the flowers in the garden were admired
by the Cilician woman. The resolutions of the
army (say, the things which seemed fit^ to the
army) were reported to the interpreter. These
things were sought for by the same trumpeter.
* Art. withpres. part. f Aor. part.
J Art. with perf. part. ^ Art. with aor. part.
GREEK EXERCISES. 103
This man was brought up according to the laws
of the Persians (say, in the Persians' laws).
Sparta was shaken by a very dreadful earth-
quake. Many disgraceful things* were done on
that day.
2. The general was thus freed from fear and
anxiety. The king's army was struck with asto-
nishment by the camels. The general was left
in the tent. Hystaspes was despatched with
(say, leading) an army to Phrygia. The mes-
senger was put to death. Not in the same coun-
try with us were ye reared. The Grecian horse-
men were turned to flight by the barbarians.
All the trees in the park were cut down. A few
of the charioteers were injured. Many of the
commanders were injured in the eyes by the cold
winds.
XXXI. — First Aorist Middle.
Remark 1. This tense is made by prefixing the
augment, adding aa to the Crude Form, and
affixing the same person-endings as in the past
imperfect, but without connecting vowels.
(Ttt-jUTjv, cra-jutaa,
(cra-cTO, (Ta-o,) <j(jj, aa-aOE,
tra-TOj aa-vTO.
* Neut. plur. of adj.
104 GREEK EXERCISES.
Example,
C.¥. (3ov\(v. Aor. T,F. c-j3ovX€t;-<ra.
E-^ov\ev-(Ta-fiT]v I deliberated,
(-(3ov\iv-c{a-(Jo, ao,) (o Thou didst deliberate,
e-(5ov\ev-(Ta-ro He deliberated,
£-f3ov\eV'<Ta-fie9a We deliberated,
£-j8oyX£u-<Ta-<T0£ Ye deliberated,
e-(Sov\tv-(ja-vTO They deliberated.
Remark 2. The aorist in Orj is in some verbs
used with an active signification.
1. The Greeks drew up opposite, as-if-they-in-
tended to lead^ towards the mountain. At-the-
same-time all the soldiers called out. The bar-
barians began to run. I vowed to sacrifice to the
other gods according to (my) ability. The sol-
diers fought boldly for their country. Thou
didst begin to run. The generals decreed that
this was the best. Having walked (1 aor. part.)
from the river to the camp, he rested. There the
Greeks rested gladly, on-seeingf a plain. The
horsemen plotted against them. The false guides
shared the money. Clearchus commanded the
willing Greeks in the war against the king. The
same exile received very valuable gifts from
us. The farmers got possession of a very fine
farm. The gods did not gratify the tyrants in
* MQ with fut. part. f 2nd aor. part.
GREEK EXERCISES. 105
every thing. I myself began to wonder when-I-
saw* the splendour of the army.
2. They marched through (the country of) the
Carduchi. The children reverenced the good
father. I conversed with them respecting the
war. The masters were displeased with their
idle slaves. Ye wished to hunt the famished
wolves. The mother was pleased with her beau-
tiful daughter. The Greeks were ashamed to
flee.
XXXII. — Second Aorist Middle.
Remark. This tense is made by prefixing the
augment to the Crude Form, and adding the same
terminations as in the past imperfect. The dif-
ference between the two tenses here, as in the
active, is, that the past imperfect is made from
the Increased Form, and the second aorist from
the Crude Form.
Example.
C. F. ytv. 2nd Aor. T. F. t-ytv.
i-yiv-o-tinv I became, e-yev-o-fjieea We became,
f-ytv-(e.(7o, 60,) ov Thou becamest, £.yev-e.(r9s Ye became,
t-yev-e-To He became, e-yev-o-vro They became.
Cyrus, when he perceived that they had passed
over (ace. of perf. part.), was pleased (1 aor. pass.).
These (persons) came to him to Sardis. We
2nd aor. part.
IQQ GREEK EXERCISES.
perceived that Cyrus had fallen (perf. part.) The
heralds arrived at the tent about ""dmght A
great shouting arose in the village The ^"^.e^s
faid-hold-of Orontes by the girdle.* The kmg
learnt all these things from the deserters. As
many as had (imperf.) the islands turned to
piracy. When they were near, the heavy-armed
Ln turned. Cyrus promised a golden wreath to 1
each of the Greeks. The deserters followed the
faithless guide.
- I
XXXIII. — Present Perfect Passive and I
Middle; the Comparative in ION, and '
Superlative in ISTO.
Remark 1. The present perfect is made from
the Crude Form by prefixing the reduphcat.on as
!n the active, and adding the following termma-
tions. i
rat 3. vrai. [
The terminations are the same as in the present
and future tenses, but they are added to the.
Crude Form without connectmg vowels and
hence no contraction takes place m the 2n(l
person singular. |
* Genitive.
GREEK EXERCISES.
107
Examples.
C. F. \v. T. F. Xt-Xv.
\i-\v-nai I have been loosened, \t-\v-iif.Qa "We have been loos-
ened,
\(.-\v'<rai Thou hast been loos- X£-Xu-<70£ Ye have been loos-
ened, ened,
Xt-Xv-Tat He has beai loosened, Xe-Xv-vrat They have been loos-
ened.
C. F. aive. T. F. yvrj.
yvijfiaif yvTJixeOay
yvqaaiy yvrjtrQet
yvijrai, yvijvrai.
Remark 2. In consequence of the absence of
connecting vowels in this tense, and of all the
personal endings beginning with consonants,
many changes take place in Crude Forms which
end in consonants. The following is a table of
these changes, by which it will be seen that the
personal terminations are never altered, except
that the o- of the 2nd person plur. is dropped.
Consonant of C. F.
The labials tTj (3, <p,
The gutturals *c, y, X)
The dentals r, ^, 0,
Consonant of
Termination.
with ..
with ..
with
Result of their combination.
become
fifi.
;//=7r(T.
TTT.
i>9.
y/i.
KT,
x0.
(Tfl.
(T (being dropped).
ffr.
<tO.
108 GREEK EXERCISES.
These changes take place in all the perfect pas-
sive tenses, infinitives, and participles, except the
future perfect.
No general rules applicable to all the persons
can be given respecting verbs ending in a liquid ;
the following are the principal points to be at-
tended to :
v-ju becomes ju/i ; but av-fi generally becomes
aa-fi : and v is often dropped in all the persons.
In p-<79, X-aOf v-o-O, (T is struck out.
In the other combinations the liquid generally
remains unchanged.
The termination of the 3rd person plural is not
included in the above table, because when the
Crude Form ends in a consonant that person is
not made by inflexion, but, as in Latin with all
the perfect passive forms, by the perfect participle
and the verb eg. The reason of this is, that three
consonants are not, as a general rule, allowed to
come together in Greek ; the chief exceptions
being where the second and third consonants are
a mute and liquid, or where the first and second
consonants are the nasal y and a guttural; nor
would it do to omit either of the letters v, r,
since the v is necessary to distinguish the plural
from the singular, and r is the characteristic of
the 3rd person : the same objection does not
exist to striking out the o* in the termination of
the 2nd person plural, because its character is
sufficiently preserved by the 6t,
GREEK EXERCISES. 109
The perfect participle is made by the redupli-
cation and the suffix ij.evo for the masc. and neut.,
and juLEva for the feminine. The same euphonic
changes take place in the perfect participle as in
the perfect tense.
Ejeamples.
C.F. TVTT.
TS-TVfl-fiai, TS-TV[l-fliOa,
Tt-Tv\l/aL, Te-Tv<p-9e,
rc-rvTT-rat, re-rvfi-fitvoL cici.
C. F. Tzpay.
TTE-Trpay-fiai, Tre-irpay-fitOa,
7re-7rpa'£,aij nn-Tr pax-Qt,
ire-irpaK-Taij 7r£-7rpay-/i€vot
eicri.
C. F. tdid ' accustom.'
tiBia-fiai, tiQia-fitQa,
ei9i-(Tai, uQi-aQt,
(.iQia-rai, uQia-^itvoi uai.
Remark 3. The second way of forming the
comparative and superlative of adjectives is by
adding Tov, or ov for the comparative, and laro
for the superlative, either to the Crude Form of
the simple adjective, after dropping the final
vowel, or to the root of the adjective.
Examples.
rjdv * sweet/ Comp. rjd-lov, Sup. rjS-iaro,
txO-po ' inimical,' eX0-iov, exB-iaro.
KaK-o * bad,' kuk-Iov, kuk-ioto.
The following is a list of the principal adjectives
which form their comparatives and superlatives in
this way, in addition to the examples above
given. Some of them have also comparatives in
TCjOo, and superlatives in raro.
L
110
GREEK EXERCISES.
Positive.
Comparative.
Superlatii
raxv 'quick,'
raxiov,
TaxiCTTO.
aya9o * good,'
a/den'oVf
apiaro.
KoXo * beautiful,'
KaWiov,
kuWktto
aitrxpo 'base,'
aiaxtov,
aiaxi^ro.
oXtyo 'few,'
Heiov,
oKiyKTTO.
fiiya ' great,'
fisilov,
}llyi<7T0.
TToXv ' many,'
ttXsiov or
TrXeov,
TrXeioTo.
eXax* ' small,'
t\a<T<TOV,
eKaxi-(JTo
Of these comparatives the same forms serve for
masculine and feminine, the nom. sing, of vi^hich
ends in wv, the neut. in ov. In the ace. sing, and
in the nom. ace. and voc. plur. the v is omitted,
and then contraction takes place.
Example.
Plural.
M. & F. N.
\itiZ,{ov-ic,, oeg) ovg, fiH^{ova,oa) u),
jJLElZoVdJV, fl£l(^OV(i)V,
fisi^om, fxeiKocri,
IJLEit!,{ov-aQfOaQ) ovg, nHZ,{ova,oa)oj,
fiei'C(ov-sg, oeg)ovg, /u£i^(ova,oa)w.
Singular.
M. & F. N.
N. fitll^UJV, jiu^ov,
G. iin'Zovogj /isi^ovog,
D. nu^ovL, fxei^ovi,
A. ixeiZ(ovafOa) (0, fiei^ov,
V, fiu'Cov, fitiKov.
I. PASSIVE.
I have been brought up at the king's gates.
The letter has been w^ritten by the boy. We
have been saved by thee. Ye have been shot at
by the bowmen. The guide has been enriched
by the Corinthians. This man has been con-
sidered more inimical to thee than to me. This
general has been said to be better than all the
* The positive is obsolete, jxiKpo being used instead.
GREEK EXERCISES. ] 1 1
other barbarians. We have been taught to rule.
A great abundance of the most delicious (say,
sweetest) meats and drinks have been sold by the
shopkeepers. There will be a great abundance
of the more delicious scents and sights. What
has been considered more beautiful than this?
The animals have been given to me by the king.
The disease has been stopped by the physician.
To some it has been appointed to remain, to
others (it has been appointed) to come. The ex-
peditions of either party have ceased (say, have
been stopped). All these things have been ac-
complished by the commanders. Ye have been
thrown into confusion on the mountains. All
these things have been said correctly by thee.
The commander has been wounded in the eye.
Fewer flowers have been chosen by us than by
you. The greater wild beasts have been hunted
by the scouts. The quickest horses have been
hired by the queen's steward. Most of the women
(say, the most women) have been frightened.
Not in luxury have we been reared. The trees
have been cut down in the park. The doors have
been shut by the servant. I have been persuaded
by thee to flee out of Greece. The plants have
been dried up. It has been agreed on (say,
prepared) by us, having opened the gates to
introduce the army. The heralds have been
crowned. The army has been scattered. Thou
hast been accustomed to run faster. The servant
112 GREEK EXERCISES.
has been admired for his kindness and faithful-
ness. In all men has been implanted a desire
for independence.
II. MIDDLE.
The soldiers have packed up their baggage, and
are arming themselves. I have learnt all these
things from the herald and the deserters. The
interpreter has obliged me in this. We have
ceased walking. Before the vi^ork you have
deliberated well. The Greeks have made an ex-
pedition against the Persians. The slaves have
tasted of liberty. The war has ended. The
Greeks have encamped near the bridge. I have
been annoyed at your doing these things (say,
you doing these things). Ye have cured the
soldier's severe wounds. Thou hast got posses-
sion of many most beautiful things. The gar-
deners have chosen the lofty trees. We have
been on our guard lest we should seem to be
fleeing.
XXXIV. — Past Perfect Passive and
Middle.
Remark. This tense has the same prefixes as
in the active, namely, the reduplication and the
augment ; and the following terminations : —
jurjv 1. jULsOa
(TO 2. (jOs
TO 3. VTO.
GREEK EXERCISES.
113
The terminations are the same as in the imper-
fect tense, but, as in the present perfect, they are
added without connecting vowels, so that all the
rules respecting the changes of consonants, &:c.,
given in the previous exercise apply to the past
perfect also. When the Crude Form ends in a
consonant, the 3rd pers. plur. is made by the
perfect participle and rtaav, the past imperfect of
Examples.
C. F. Xv.
e-Xs-Xv-fiTjv
s-Xe-Xv-cro
s-Xe-Xv-TO
1 had been loosened,
Thou hadst been loosened,
He had been loosened,
^'Xi-Xv-fieOa
e-Xe-Xv-aOe
e-Xe-Xv-vTo
We had been loosened,
Ye had been loosened,
They had been loosened.
C. F. TVTT.
C.F. Trpay.
e-rt-Tv^-firjv, e-re-rvfi-fiiOa,
t-Tt-TVipo, e-Te-TV(()-9e,
t-Te-TVTT-TO, TS.-TVll-Hf.VOl T]<TaVy
e-Tre-Trpay-fiTiv,
€-7re-7rp«4'o,
e-7re-7rpaK-T0.
C. F. eOid.
ei9i(T-fir}v, HQi<T-nt9a,
£101-0-0, £t0l-(T0£,
e-7re-'7rpay-fit9a,
e-Tre-7rpax-9£j
Trt-Trpay-jxtvoi r]<jav
£101(7-70, £l0lO--/ifVOl
T](rav.
I.
PASSIVE
I had been brought up at the king's gates.
The youth had been wounded under the eye. We
had been taught to do these things. The truce
had been violated by the enemies. All these
L 2
114 GREEK EXERCISES.
things had been accomplished by the king. The
letter had been written by the youth in Egyp-
tian. This man had been declared satrap of
Lydia. The king's army had been turned to
flight. The brother had been punished by the
cruel gardener. The sisters had been wounded.
The disease had been stopped by the ])hysician.
This general had been said to be the most ini-
mical to the king, of all the Greeks. Out of the
villages had been plundered even the very*
timber from the houses. The doors had been
shut by the servant. Much clothing had been
left behind in the camp. The most beautiful
goblets had been sold by the Scythians. The
horsemen had been shut out by the governor of
the village. All these things had been made-evi-
dent. The army of the Greeks had been con-
quered and scattered. Agesilaus had been
crowned. From the canal ditches had been cut,
somef large, others small. The provisions had
been burnt up. All the largest trees had been
cut down by the men.
II. MIDDLE.
We had all packed up, and were arming our-
selves. I had ceased to run. Before the march
thou hadst deliberated well. The commander
had chosen death rather than dishonour. We
* In Greek the order is " very the timbers."
f Vide note, p. 46.
GREEK EXERCISES. 115
had rushed forward against the left wing. Con-
cerning the safety of the state thou hadst been
afraid. The slaves in the islands had tasted of
liberty. We had learnt all these things from (sic)
the deserters. Artaxerxes having heard of the
armament of Cyrus, made counter-preparations.
The Greeks had encamped near the bridges. Ye
had obliged us in these (points). In-the-time-of
Darius he-had-made-a-truce with the deserters.
XXXV. — Future Perfect Passive and
Middle.
Remark 1. The future perfect is made from
the Crude Form by prefixing the reduplication,
and by adding the suffix o- and the same personal
terminations as in the future imperfect.
Example.
C. F. \v. Fut. Perf. T. F. Xt-Xv-a.
Xs'Xv-ff-o-ixai, Xe-Xv-<T-o-ii(9a,
Xa-Xv-a^e-ffai, sai,) y, Xe-Xv-(T-e-u9e,
Xe-Xv-ff-e-Taij Xt-Xv-ff'O-vrai.
Vide the exercise on the future active for the
euphonic changes.
This tense is not unfrequently made by the
perfect passive participle, and the future tense of
Remark 2. This tense cannot be exactly trans-
lated by any forms of the English verb ; it is com-
monly rendered by the words "shall have been" —
116 GREEK EXERCISES.
which is the nearest representative of its meaning ;
but it differs from the EngHsh and Latin future per-
fect in being used to denote a future action, the
effects of which will be permanent : so that it
bears the same relation to the other future tenses
(which express momentary actions) as the present
perfect does to the aorists.
Good things will have been mingled with bad.
I shall have been left behind by thee. The bridge
will have been taken down (say, loosed). We shall
have been left behind by the Greeks. The truce
will have been broken by the Persians. The
trees will have been cut down in the park. If we
do these things,* Ariaeus will immediately revolt,
so that no friend will have been left to us, but
even those who formerly weref (so) will be ene-
mies to us. The villages will have been burnt
up. The doors will have been shut. The letters
will have been written by the boys in the Persian
language. A hundred citizens will have been
murdered by the enemies. The constitution will
have been completely organized. It will have
been appointed to the older (man) to rule all the
younger (men). The citizens will-remain-enrolled
in the same class.
* Genitive absolute.
t The relative clause is to be translated by the article and par-
ticiple.
GREEK EXERCISES. 117
II. MIDDLE.
The army will have rested. I shall have ac-
quired much property. Ye will have remembered
the evil deeds of the cruel robber. The skilful
physician will have healed the boy's wounds.
The seer will have sacrificed. The soldiers will
not have packed up their baggage before the
march. The enemies will have encamped in the
plain before the evening.
XXXVI. — Tenses of the Subjunctive.
As in the Active Voice, these tenses are dis-
tinguished by long connecting vowels.
1. Present Imperfect.
The personal terminations are the same as
those of the present indicative.
(jj'fxai, {r}-<jai) r?, rj-rai, w-fieOa, ri-crOe, tj-vrai.
In the contract verbs ay becomes a ; arj, a : oy
becomes oi ; ot^, w. Of all other combinations
the result is the same as in the consonant verbs.
Examples.
C.F. ray.
I. F. racrff.
c
. F. viKa.
Ta(T(T-u)-fiai,
Ta(T(T-(t)-fii9a,
viK(i)-fiaif
viK(i)-fie9aj
Taaa-y,
raaff-rj-crdej
viKq.,
viKa-aOsj
Taa<r-r]-Tai,
Taaa-(jj-vrai.
VlKU'Taif
viKio-vrai.
C.F.
aive.
C.
F. fiiffOo,
aivbj-fiaif
aiv(jj-ne9a,
IMiaOoj-fiait
fiicrQuj-fiEOay
aivy,
aivr]-aBt,
fiiaOoi,
fll(T9(t)-<T9£j
aivrj-rai,
aivoj-vTUi.
fxicrOoj-Tai,
fii(T9<A)-vTai.
118 GREEK EXERCISES.
I. PASSIVE.
I speak, that we may be saved. If the trees shall
be a-planting in the garden to-morrow, this lady
will wish to see (them). The heralds have come*
in order that a truce may be made. The orator
will never leave off speaking while thou art
honoured. If ye are honoured by the king
of Armenia it will be well. The judge him-
self has punished the thief, in order that the
honest citizens may not be plundered. Do you
wish that we should be sent away ? The same
shepherd will send a letter, in order that the
slave may be pursued. If the foxes are sought
for, they will be found. The base traitors will be
sent with the army in order that they may be
guarded. Do not move your legs while the sore
is being examined by the physician.
II. MIDDLE.
Beasts of burden have been hired in order that
the army may march. You will be prosperous
whenever you choose virtue rather than worldly-
good (say, than pleasant things, neut. plur. adj.
with art.). Do you wish that I should promise
to come to you ? If the heavy-armed men are
afraid, we shall not win the battle. The king
has sent a messenger, in order that he may
hire as many foreign soldiers as possible. Let
* Use pres. imperfect of j/»c.
GREEK EXERCISES. 119
men act justly, in order that they may not be
hated. The beggars will not work while they
receive alms.
2. Present Perfect.
This tense is formed of the perfect passive
participle and the subjunctive of the verb eg.
Example.
Xe-\v'fjLevoQ (I), Xe-Xv-fjievoi (jjjulev,
Xe-Xv-juevoc yg, Xe-Xv-fievoi yrE,
Xe-Xv-juLEvog r?, Xe-Xv-juevoi oxri.
So with drjXo, perf. part. S£-StjX(u-ju£vo ; ray,
perf. part. re-Tay-fxevo ; ypa^, perf. part, ye-ypafi-
fJLtVO.
I. passive.
The messengers themselves will remain until
the letters have been written. If the Greeks shall
have been reduced-to- slavery, we shall soon be in
danger. Whenever this work has been accom-
plished I will give the pay to the workmen. If
the truce shall have been made, the islanders will
rejoice. Unless these things shall have been
done, the commander will be greatly enraged.
II. MIDDLE.
When the generals have replied, the heralds^
will go back to the king. If the Scythians have
got possession of the property, the soldiers will
120 GREEK EXERCISES.
immediately follow them. The physician will re-
main until he has chosen the garment. If ye
have promised any thing to the fisherman, he will
certainly expect it.*
3. AoRisTs Passive.
The following are the terminations of these
tenses, which are distinguished from those of the
same tense in the active voice only by the circum-
flex accent. These are in reality contracted forms,
the full forms having £ before the personal termi-
nations, thus from rax-Oe-oj comes rax'Obi, from
SK-irXay-e-is), CK-TrXay-w.
Examples.
1st Aorist. 2nd Aorist,
rax-O-Mf Tax-0-ii^iJ.ev,
rax'O-yg, rax-O-rire,
Tax-O-yj Tax-O-wai.
EK-TrXay-ojf EK-TrXay-wjuev,
EK-irXay-yg, BK-wXay-riTE,
EK-irXay-y, eK-TrXay-tScri.
1. This truce shall last (remain) until these
things are reported to the king. When the
march is accomplished, the heralds will come.
If these things are made evident to me, I will
concede whatf you desire. Unless the scouts
are sent away immediately, they will not reach
the city in time. The seed is sown, in order that
the harvest may be gathered in. Do ye wish that
* TOVTO. t Plural.
GREEK EXERCISES. ]21
we should be slain ? If the Greeks are conquered,
no one will be safe. The general will not march
until the army is drawn up. If the house is burnt
down it will certainly be rebuilt by the owner.
The ambassador himself advises us to speak truly,
in order that ye may not be deceived. Remain
until thou art ordered to go away. This woman
will delay until the children are found.
2. The Lacedaemonians will continue the bat-
tle until the enemies are turned to flight. If you
are freed from anxiety, we shall be°glad. The
heavy-armed men rush forward in order that the
townspeople may be struck with astonishment.
If this prisoner be put to death, the soldiers will
act-unjustly. Do not flee until the bridges are cut
down. We remain at home lest we should be
injured in the eyes by the wind and dust.
4. AoRisTS Middle.
The personal terminations of these tenses are
the same as those of the present indicative
passive, the connecting vowels, of course, being
long, before which the final a of the 1st aor.
tense form disappears.
Examples.
^^^ Aorist. 2nd Aorist.
(3ov\iv.<r.uj.fiat, (iovXtv-a-io-^itQa, yev-io-ixai, yev-uj-fieSa,
Pov\ev.(T.y, (3ov\sv.tT.r,-cTee, yev^y, yev-.j-^Oe,
PovXev.(T.r].Tai, (3ov\sv.(T.w.vTai. ysv-n-rai, yev(o-vrai.
122 GREEK EXERCISES.
] . If the shopkeeper receives money from the
citizen, he will never restore it. We will ascend
the hill, in order that we may rest on the top.
If ye plot against me, you shall be punished as
severely as possible. What shall the soldiers
themselves have, if they oblige the king in these
matters?^ The Greeks will not come-to-terms
with those of the opposite faction before they
consult with us. Until the ambassador concludes-
the-truce, he will not send away the interpreter.
The same commanders are haranguing the sol-
diers in order that they may fight boldly.
2. If the horseman perceives that the village
has been set on fire,t he will ride at-the-top-of-his-
speed in order that he may report to the captain.
Until the messengers arrive, the shouting will
not cease. If you lay-hold-of me, I will strike
you with this stick. These guides will lead you
as safely as possible, if the truce be agreed upon
(say, takes place). If we promise any thing we
will not deceive you. Unless the deserters follow
the army, they will be captured.
XXXVII.— Tenses of the Optative.
Most of these tenses are distinguished from
the corresponding tenses of the indicative by the
characteristic m or l, as in the Active Voice.
* Neut. plur. of rovro. t Perf. participle.
GREEK EXERCISES.
123
All the tenses, except the aorists passive, have
the same personal terminations as the past tenses
of the indicative, with the exception, that as there
are no connecting vowels in the optative, the 2nd
person sing, ends in o, not ou ( = £o), as in the
indicative.
1. Past Imperfect.
Examples.
Ta<T(T-Ol.-flT)V,
raffcr-oi-fieOa,
viKqt-firjv,
viKqi-fitOa,
Tacr(T-oi-o,
ra(T(r-0L'(T9e,
VlK(iJ-0,
viKif-ffOe,
Ta<T<T-Ol-TO,
Taca-oi-vTO.
. VLK(^-TOj
VlKl^-VTO.
aivoi-^iTfVf
aLvot-fisOa,
jJLKTOoi-firjV,
fiKrOoi-ixeOa,
aivoi-Of
aivoL-<T9e,
fiiaBoi'O,
[XKrQoi-crOe,
aivoi-TOj
aivoi-vTo.
fii(T9oL-ro,
fj-iaQoi-VTO.
I. passive.
The impudent boy said he was admired for his
industry. We were inquiring whether the nations
of Asia were being conquered. The messengers
answered that we were being asked about the
constitution. The king of the barbarians did
this in order that the Greeks might be frightened.
The citizens knew that the traitor was being led
to death. The women themselves suspected that
(jurj) the golden ornaments were hid in the iron
box. The foolish citizen had reported that a lion
was often seen in the wood. The aUies wondered
that we were not deceived. The interpreter said
the master would stay in the village while the
servants were being punished. The witness sug-
124 GREEK EXERCISE?.
gested this in-order-that {Iva) the thief might
be persuaded to confess his guilt. If ye should
be pursued, / also would flee. If the barbarians
were sailing away, the sailors would be kept in
prison. If the creditor should sell the farm and
house, the husbandman would be greatly pitied.
We heard that the philosopher was annoyed at
the folly of his own son.
II. MIDDLE.
The same soldier said he did not receive suffi-
cient pay. The creditors used-to-assemble in
order that they might contribute to the main-
tenance of the debtor. The islanders wondered
that we marched through the country without-
doing-damage. The flatterer replied that he
always consulted with his friends. These dis-
ciples inquired whether the-men-of-old* used
to choose liberty rather than riches. If thou
wert commanding a very great army, thou
wouldst not often be at leisure. If the seer
wished for any thing, he would obtain it from the
gods to whom he sacrifices.
2. Past Perfect.
This tense is made in the same way as the
Present Perfect Subjunctive : viz. by the perfect
passive participle and the optative of eg.
* Use art. with the adverb ' long ago.'
GREEK EXERCISES. 125
Example.
Xe-Xv-fiEvog Hr}v, Xe-Xv-fxevoi eirjimev,
Xe-Xv-fjLEvog iirig, Xe-Xu-jitsvot eirjTcy
Xe-Xv-fXEvoQ ur\, Xs-Xv-juevoi eLr}(Tav.
I. PASSIVE.
The masters inquired whether the corn had
been purified as completely as possible. The
towns-people wondered that the aiFair had not
been accomplished. The messenger reported that
the truce had been broken. We said that the
citizens had been thrown into confusion.
II. MIDDLE.
Clearchus himself inquired whether the Greeks
had replied to the ambassador. The enemy
knew well that we had encamped. I perceived
that you had chosen life rather than virtue. These
robbers learnt that the horsemen had ceased
riding.
3. Futures Indefinite Passive.
Ea^amples.
1st Future. 2n(i Future.
Twp-Orja-oi-fiTiVf TV(f)-9ii(T-oi-[i£9a,
TV^-0r](T-Ol-Oj TV(p-9T](T-Ol-(j9£y
tv(P'9ti(t-oi-to, Tv^-9ria-oi-vTo.
XiTT-rjCF-oi-o, \nr-ri<T-oi-<T9f,
Xnr-ri(T-oi-TO, Xiir-ijcr-oi-vTo.
1. The woodman said that the other tree would
be cut down in the evening. ^'^ The philosopher
* Use genitive.
M 2
\
12Q GREEK EXERCISES.
had replied that the boys should be brought
up most honourably. We inquired whether we
should be prevented by the horsemen. There
the scout learnt that ye would be prevented from
entering the town. It was reported that thou
wouldst be compelled to quit the country.
2. The gardeners wondered whether these trees
would be cut down. The deserters said that we
should be turned to flight. These women in-
quired whether thou wast struck with astonish-
ment.
4. Future Imperfect, Passive and Middle.
Example.
dv'CT'Oi-fxnv, Ov-cT-oi-fXtOay
dv'G-oi-o, ev-cT-oi-aOe,
Ov'(J-OL-rO, dv-CT-Oi'VTO.
I. PASSIVE.
I heard that the oxen would be sacrificed by
the priest. The same old men said that we should
be ensnared in the very narrow passes. The
soldiers reported that ye would be freed from all
your troubles.
II. MIDDLE.
The farmer inquired whether we would hire
the land. Thou saidst that thou wouldst get
possession of our property. This barber replied
that he would choose the horse rather than the
GREEK EXERCISES. 127
camel. I was wondering whether the soldiers
would pack up their baggage before midnight.
The islanders themselves inquired whether they
would march through Greece. We said that we
would follow the enemy across the broader river.
5. Future Perfect, Passive and Middle.
Example,
re-Ta^-OL-fJLr}v, rs-ra^'Ot-iuLeOa,
TE-ra^-oL-Oy TS-ra^-oi-crOe,
TE-ra^-OL-TOf TE-ra^-oi-vTO.
This tense is also made with the perf. participle
and the fut. optative of eg.
I. passive.
Clearchus said that no friend would be left to
them. The general reminded them that they
would be buried in the Cerameicus. The Lace-
daemonians promised the Tegeans that they
should be drawn up next to themselves.
II. middle.
I told you beforehand that he would not re-
member you. His friends expected that he would
possess the estate. He said that the enemy
would rest when their work was finished (perf.
opt.) but not before {irpoTspov Se ov). I replied that
I should have encamped long-before the enemy.
128 GREEK EXERCISES.
6. AoRiSTS Passive.
The terminations are the same as in the aorists
indicative, but the characteristic ei is inserted
before them.
Ea;amples.
1st Aorist. 2nd Aorist.
\v-9-£i-Tiv, \v-9-st-rjfiev, a7ro-(TTa\-ei-T]v, a7ro-oTaX-ei-?7/i£v,
Xv-O'ei-rjg, Xv-O-H-rtTe, aTro-araX-u-riQ, airo-araX-ti-riTe,
\v-Q-u--n, \v-e-ei r/aav. aTro-oraX-ei-t], a7ro-(rraX-£i-7j(Tav.
1. Cyrus used-to-find-out as many pretexts as
possible, in order that ye might be caught unpre-
pared. If the enemy were seen (imperfect), we
should be thrown into confusion. Then indeed it
was known that the man was-secretly-sent by the
barbarians. The scouts reported that the horses
were frightened by their fires. The general re-
mained in the camp until the army was drawn up.
It seemed fit to us to go forward until Cyrus should
be found. This interpreter said that the arms were
o-iven up. Ye were afraid lest the vessels should
be left behind at the island. If thou shouldst
be deceived thou wouldst be pardoned. The
guides replied that their eyes were injured by
the dust. We knew that what the satrap did
was praised by the citizens. He was afraid lest
we should be surrounded from-both-sides.
2. The sailors wondered that we were turned
to flight. The judge himself came, in order that
GREEK EXERCISES.
129
the robber might be put to death. We heard that
all the trees were cut down. If the prisoner
should be left in the tent, he would be injured by
the most cruel barbarians. The workmen told
me that ye were despatched to Athens.
7. AoRisTs Middle.
2nd Aorist.
yeV'Oi-iiijv, yfv-oi-fieOa,
yev-oi-o, yev-oi-(T9e,
yev-oi-TO, yeV'Oi-VTO.
1st Aorist.
\V'(Ta-i-fiT]Vf Xv-aa-i-fitQuy
\v-ca-i-o, Xv'ffa-i-crOs,
Xv-aa-i-ro, \v-aa-i-vTO.
1. If the enemy were to draw-up-opposite, ye
would begin to run. They inquired whether the
king made-a-truce with us. That orator said
that the Athenians blamed the allies for their
cowardice. The witness had admitted that his
brother sent for the tax-gatherer. Ye replied
that I did not administer your affairs well.^
The slaves came together in order that the
master might gratify them in this respect. If
you were to make use of my house, I should be
glad. The commanders heard that the sailors
exhorted one another. These priests doubted
whether we vowed the sacrifice to the gods whom
they served.
2. The woman herself was asking whether the
damsel became a nightingaje. I would prefer
* Ka\(x)Q.
130 GREEK EXERCISES.
death to slavery. If the doves were-set-free,*
would they choose to remain ? It had been re-
ported that the enemy perceived the approach of
our horsemen. We remained in the same village
until we learned where the gold was concealed.
XXXVIII. — Tenses of the Imperative.
The following are the personal terminations of
all these tenses except the aorist passive ; —
2. 3. 2. 3.
Sing. (TO, (tOu), Plur. (tOe, o-0wv oro-^wo-av.
The 2nd sing, in all the tenses but the perfect
has been changed.
1. Imperfect.
Examples.
\eLir-{e-(jOf e-o)oVf XsLTT-s-crdef
Xenr-e-aOii), \enT-£-(TOu)v or XetTT-E-o-^wo-av.
vtK(a-e-Gro, a-e-o)cJ, vfKa-o-^e,
viKa-(T6it), vLKa-<jBu)v or viKa-aOojcrav.
<f>lX{e-£'(TO, €-£-o)oU (f)LXH-(T9s3
<pi\si-<j6ix)y (piXei-dOwv or (piku-ctdwaav.
8r]X(o-£-(TO,o-£-o)ou, ^rikov-crOsf
^riXov-crSw, criXov-aO^jjv or dtiXov-trBuyaav.
* a<l>e9et.ri<TaVf from l ' let go.'
GREEK EXERCISES. 131
I. PASSIVE.
Be not thou deceived by the words of this de-
ceitful man. Let the servants be summoned.
Let the plan of the king be explained. Let these
deserters be sought for in the very thick wood.
Be not ye frightened by the wild beasts. Be thou
persuaded by the interpreter. Let not the truce
be broken by the barbarians.
II. MIDDLE.
Ask-for-yourselves^ oh children, not to be ban-
ished from the land.* Do not hurry, my friend.
Let the soldiers arm themselves. Let the general
himself be on his guard against treachery.-f-
Choose ye whatj ye desire. Let the bowmen
march quickly into that city. Do not pack up
your baggage before the evening. Let the
citizen oblige us in this respect. Hire ye the
swift horses for the expedition.
2. Perfect.
Vide Remarks on the perfect indicative.
Examples.
ye-ypaxb-o, ye-ypa(p-9e,
ye-ypa(j)-9<t), ye-ypa<p-9(i)Vj or
ye-y pa(p'9ii)aav.
Ixt-fivri-tTO, fie'fivri-a9e,
fie-fivi]-<T9(i), fis-fiv7]-<79ujv, or
lit-}ivri-a9u)aav.
This tense is used to denote the complete termi-
* Accusative. t * Against treachery.' ace.
t Plural.
132
GREEK EXERCISES.
nation of an action, its results being permanent.
There being no corresponding form in English,
the meaning of the sentence, as shewn by the
context, can alone determine when this tense is
to be used.
I. PASSIVE.
Let the letters be written by the boys them-
selves. Be ye appointed _to transact the affairs of
the state. Let that constitution also be excluded
which they call an oligarchy. Let the anchor be
weighed. Let these robbers be thrown into
prison. Let your tardiness be limited. Be thou
taught the Greek language. Be ye enriched, oh
citizens, with many gifts. Let all things be done
before I return. Let all things be prepared by
the servants. Let the doors of the temple be shut.
II. MIDDLE.
Let the children cease running. Deliberate
well before ye do any thing. Receive thou these
gifts from a true friend. Let the islanders re-
member to present me with a very beautiful horse.
Let the workman contrive a more useful machine.
Remember ye to spare the w^omen and children.
Let the heavy-armed men pack up their baggage.
3. AoRiSTS Passive.
The terminations of these tenses are the fol-
lowing : —
GREEK EXERCISES. 133
2. 3. 2. 3.
Sing. 6i, TO). Plur. re, rwcrav.
As the 1 st aorist has the suffix Or^, the termina-
tion 9i is in that tense changed into rt.
1st Aorist.
\v-9r]-TL, \v-9ri-TS,
Xv-Oij-Tio, \v-9r}-T0)Gav,
Vide Remarks on the Aorist imperative active.
2nd Aorist.
TpaTr-rj-Oi, rpaTr-Tj-re,
rpaTT-Tj-TO), TpaTV'i)-T()j(Tav.
1. Let the oxen be sacrificed. Be ye severely
punished. Reverence the gods, oh young man.
Let this tree be cut down. Be ye drawn up on
the top of the hill. Let the bold Persians be de-
clared generals of the whole army. Be not thou
induced to leave behind your property. Let the
same scouts be sent, in order that they may exa-
mine the country. Let this be reported to the
sailor. Be ye taught by the elders who are wiser
than yourselves. Let the robber be killed. Let
the hares be caught. Let the stolen goods be
concealed in the darker cave.
2. Be thou freed from fear, beautiful girl. Let
these traitors be despatched into the most dan-
gerous country. Be ye reared with the other
children at-the-court-of the king. Let the very
slow horse be spurred. Be thou pierced in the
ears with a sharp needle. Let the horseman
be struck with astonishment. Be drowned in
the sea, ye ravenous wolves.
N
134 GREEK EXERCISES.
4. AoRiSTs Middle.
The terminations of these tenses are the same
as those of the imperfect, except in the 2nd per-
son sing, of the 1st aor., which has the termi-
nation t.
Examples.
1st Aorist. 2nd Aorist.
f3ov\Bv-(ra-i, jSovXev-cra-crOe, : e\-{e-<To)ov, kX-e-rxOe,
(5ov\ev-(Ta-(T6u),(5ovXev-<ra-(r9(i)v, or eX-t-aOcjj eX-e-aOujp, or
(3ovXfv-(7a-<T9()j(Tav, ' tX-e-crObXTav.
1. Let the sheep feed in this field to-morrow.
Resolve, oh ambassadors, what ye will reply.
Taste this apple, dear child. Let the weary
soldiers pack up their baggage. Let the general
himself encamp on the other side of the river Eu-
phrates. Encamp near the villages of the Cili-
cians. Let the younger oblige the elders in all
things. Blame me, my friend, after you have
heard my defence. Send-thou-for the same guide,
and he will lead you as safely as possible. Arm
yourselves, and run to the camp.
2. Perish ye evil-doers. Choose wisdom, oh
boy, rather than riches. Let the guards lay-hold-
of the robber by the throat. Let the beggar
come hither. Promise that thou wilt come (fut.
inf.). Have-an-interview, oh generals, with the
king's messengers.
GREEK EXERCISES. 135
XXXIX. — Infinitives.
Remark. The suffix of all the passive and
middle infinitives, except the aorists passive, is
(rOai ; or, v^^ith the connecting vowel, e-aOai. This
suffix is added to the respective Tense Forms.
Vide Remarks on the active infinitive, Exerc.
XXIV.
1. Imperfect.
Ea^amples.
\v, Xv'EcrOaif to be loosened ; Xaj3, Xafif3av-e-
crOai ; viKUj viKCL-crOai ; ^tXe, (juXii-aOai ; ^tjXo, ^y}-
Xov-crOai.
I. passive.
We heard that this attendant v^^as admired for
his kindness and faithfulness. The sons of the
noblest Persians learn while- they- are "^ yet boys
both to command and to obey (say, to be com-
manded). They reply that this man is consi-
dered the best (strongest) of all in all things.f
From J what^ I hear, I judge that no one either ||
of Greeks or|| of barbarians, is admired by more
(persons) than Cyrus. It is said that another
innumerable army is collecting by Xerxes. Ye
will find that Menon is praised for his knowledge
of things § which-relate-to^"^ the drawing-up-of-
* Part, of eg. f Ace. J e^>
II Plur. relative. || In Greek, negatives must be used.
§ Article. ** afifi (with ace).
136 GREEK EXERCISES.
troops. We shall seem to be prevented froin-
doing=* these things. I hear that the kmg is
honoured by the enemies themselves. It is said
that he is being brought up according to the laws
of the Persians. The dog said to the sheep, I am
the-one-who preservesf you, so that you may
neither be stolen J by men, nor be carried ofFJ by
wolves.
II. MIDDLE AND DEPONENT.
The Greeks wish to march against the king
himself. He ordered the rest to pack up their
baggage. It is time for us to prepare. It-is-
well^ to abstain from loquacious (persons). I
wish to speak with thee. The guide wishes to oblige
us. The ambassadors advise you to save your-
selves any-way-by-which II it is possible. The
false messenger reported that you were beginning
the war. Cyrus ordered us to rush forward as
quickly as possible. It is time to hire soldiers
and to defend ourselves. The very cowardly
captain is afraid to follow with Cyrus.
2. Future Imperfect.
Vide Exerc. XXVIL, and Remarks on the
Future Infinitive Active.
* Infinitive. f Art. and imperf. part.
Imperf. infin. % tv exu. || oTvy.
GREEK EXERCISES. 137
Examples.
Xey, X£^-£(r0at ; jSovXeu, j3ovX£u-o--£(r0ai ; v£ju,
Fut. T. F. v£/x£, veiuei-dOai ; iprfcpi^, Fut. T. F.
I. PASSIVE.
I think that these things will be said by
the generals. The scouts expected that the ox
would be sacrificed in the same tent. There is a
report that the boys will be brought up at the
court of the king. The very base traitors said
that we should be freed from anxiety. Who de-
sires that ye should be ensnared by the enemy ?
II. MIDDLE.
The barbarians are going to sail away. I
conjectured that the great king would arrive at
daybreak. The soldiers are about to see ten
thousand camels. The generals were going to
consult concerning the march. The shepherd
thinks the sheep will feed along the broader
river. The soldiers are going to arm themselves.
I think that the Athenians will pass a sentence
of death against him (say, will sentence death
against him). We expected that the teacher
would offer to teach these boys the Greek lan-
guage.
3. Future Indefinite Passive.
Vide Exerc. XXVIII.
N 2
138 GREEK EXERCISES.
Examj)les.
\vj Xv'9r}(7-£(T6ai; cfteX, aTaX-r)(T-e(j6at.
1. The king himself was about to be seen* in
the market-place. The deserter is about to be
led out to death on account of his unfaithfulness.
The enemy hoped that the king would be
wounded by the commander of the Greeks. I
expect that the army of the Greeks will be scat-
tered. The youth says that the king will be
brought still living into the palace. The inter-
preter explained that some would be brought
byt sea, others byf land. The youths suspect
that the haughty priests will be prevented from
coming into the house. From what I heard,
I judged that these actions would be considered
most disgraceful by the king.
2. We hear that the interpreter suspects that
these horsemen v/ill be turned to flight as easily
as possible. The priest suspected that the bar-
bers would be struck with astonishment. There
is no doubt that this report will be spread through
the whole city. The general swore that the ships
should be sent away.
4. AoRisTS Passive.
Remark. The suffix for both the aorist passive
infinitives is vai. .
* Fut. infin. t Kara, with ace.
GREEK EXERCISES. 139
Vide ExERc. XXX.
Examples.
Au, \v-dr\-vaL ; air-aXKay, air-aXXay-ri-vai ;
kXctt, icXaTT-rj-vat.
1. The generals determined (say, it seemed fit
to the generals) that this slave should not^ be
loosed. The king determined that the cities
should be given to Cyrus, as-he-was (say, being)
his brother. The commanders determined that
the same herald should be sent to the people-of-
Miletus. The report was spread that the corn
was stolen. The citizens heard that the priest
himself was wounded in his thigh. I find that
the sweetest wine w^as all drunk up by the very
thirsty soldiers. There was a report that the
generals all had their heads cut off (say, were cut
off their heads). It is said that the boy was
bitten by the dog. It was said that the guide
was thrown into confusion on-a-sudden. The
more credulous women believed that all these
difficulties were surmounted as quickly as pos-
sible.
2. It was determined not to allow the other
vessel to be sent away. The report was spread
into the city that the enemies were scattered.
The herald brought word that the corn was spoilt.
Mr].
140 GREEK EXERCISES.
It was said that the horsemen were struck with
astonishment.
5. First Aorist Middle.
Examples,
BouXeu, j3oi>Xsu-(7a, j5ov\ev'(Ta-(T6ai; vtfi, vufi-a,
veifi-a-aOai.
1. The enemies will not have leisure (say, lei-
sure will not be to the enemies) to consult or to
prepare themselves. We wish to make a truce.
Cyrus was pleased with this wine; he wishes
therefore you also to taste it (say, this). The
very brave soldiers wished to arm themselves
with breastplates and helmets. By-a-herald-he-
ordered the Greeks to rush forward. Now-then
there is an opportunity for thee to show off thy
education.
2. Whether dost thou wish, to answer or not ?
The tyrant himself is said to have confiscated
their property (say, the property of them). We
will endeavour, with-the-aid-of the gods, to re-
pulse him. I advise you 'to answer with-mode-
ration.
6. Second Aorist Middle.
Ea;ample.
These (men) are said to have taken Orontes
GREEK EXERCISES. 141
by the girdle for death (i. e. to take him to be
put to death). Clearchus determined (say, it
seemed fit to, &c.) to have-an-interview with
Tissaphernes. They say that the general per-
ceived thee plotting against the king as plainly
as possible. There was a true report that the
traitor perished. The flatterers said that the
rich men chose the sweetest flowers. The scouts
found that the Persians turned away (mid.) from
the very deep river.
7. Perfect, Passive and Middle.
Remark. This infinitive takes the reduplica-
tion, and the sufiix (rOai.
For the particular rules respecting the redupli-
cation and the euphonic changes of the Crude
Form, vide Exerc. XXXIII.
EiTamples.
AVf Xe-Xv-crOai ; ypac^t, ye-y pa(f)-9ai ; /3Xaj3,
pe-jdXa^-Oai ] ray, Te-Ta\-Oai'y opOo, (jjpOcj-aOai ;
aiTEp, S'cnrap-Oai.
I. PASSIVE.
The enemies are said to have been shut up in
(say, into) the very strong citadel. The sons of
Xenophon are said to have been brought up in
Sparta. I hear that this truce has been broken
by the Lacedaemonians. It is said that very
beautiful peacocks have been reared by the Sami-
142 GREEK EXERCISES.
ans in-honour-of (say, to) Hera. The merchants
reported that the robbers had been murdered by
them. I find that the letters have been written
well by the youths. The farmer asserts that the
corn has been injured. Ye think that the army
of the Greeks has been scattered. It was said
that the rear-guard had been conquered. From
what we hear, we judge that no one has been
admired and praised for wisdom and justice more
than Socrates (has). It is said that the villains
have been sought for. His mother believed that
the boy had been bitten by the same dog. The
orator said that many temples had been built by
the Athenians in-honour-of (say, to) the gods.
II. MIDDLE AND DEPONENT.
I consider that thou hast consulted well. We
conjecture that the generals have marched through
this country with as large an army as possible.
That messenger answers that the soldiers have
packed up their baggage. They say that the
king has chosen those generals. The messenger
thinks that the rower has answered with-mode-
ration.
8. Future Perfect, Passive and Middle.
Remark. This infinitive is made by the re-
duplication prefixed, and the termination eadai.
Example.
C.F. Xv, Inf. Fut. Perf. Xs-Xv-cr-eaOai.
il
GREEK EXERCISES. 143
I. PASSIVE.
I conjecture that we shall have been left be-
hind by the generals. We expected that the
letters would be written. The interpreter says
that no friend will have been left to us, but that
even those who were (so) before, will be our ene-
mies. The guards suspect that the gates will
be shut the whole night. The deserter replied
that a hundred citizens would be murdered by the
enemies. It is reported that the force of the Per-
sians will have been defeated by the Greeks.
We hear that the additional-settlers will be
enrolled in (eig) the city. The lawgiver used to
boast that the constitution would be perfectly
arranged.
II. MIDDLE.
I expect that few will have received so many
gifts. This shopkeeper conjectures that many will
have-got-possession-of horses and servants. The
women fear that the boy will not remember the
road. The guides reply that the enemies will
have encamped in the same country.
XL. — Participles.
Remark. — The suffix of all the passive and
middle participles, except the aorists passive, is
|U£vo (M. k N.) jueva (F.), or, with the connecting
144 GREEK EXERCISES.
vowel, o-fjLEvo and o-fXEva ; this suffix is added to
the respective Tense Forms.
Vide Remarks on the active participles, Exerc.
XXV.
1. Imperfect.
Ea^amples.
XVf AV-O/ilEVO ; TVTT-T, TVir-T-OjULeVO; ViKa, VIKU)-
fifvo; (pike, (piXov-juevo; dr^Xo, SrjXou-juevo.
I. passive.
This army escaped notice, being maintained for
him. Aristippus, being oppressed by those of the
opposite faction at-home, comes to Cyrus. The
cities committed (to him) trusted him. The
generals died amidst insults (say, being insulted).
Artaxerxes w^as evidently (say, evident) being
plotted against. Those conquered by us are
ready to begin flight. Being hard pressed, and
being thrown into confusion, the women will
march with difficulty. He happened to be
wounded at the very instant."^ Colonists are
sent out on-the-condition-of-their-beingf equal to
those left (behind). The general crosses the very
broad river Tigres, being wetted up to the middle.
These ladies are conscious of being loved by their
servants.
t £7ri T({) eivai.
GREEK EXERCISES. 145
II. MIDDLE AND DEPONENT.
To US marching through the country there will
be an abundance of provisions. Cyrus was not
afraid-of a bear once when-it-attacked (him)
(part.). All his (the) friends and messmates died
fighting for Cyrus. Thus following, we shall be
friends to him. Though-the-king-sends-for (gen.
abs.) me, I do not wish to go. The soldiers per-
ceiving these things, were beginning to run.
Sometimes, in getting-wood from the same (place),
the Greeks and barbarians inflicted blows on one
another.* The king himself surveyed the Greeks
as they passed by. Cheirisophus happened to be
away in some village with others, laying-in-pro-
visions. This farmer happened to be hiring more
servants.
2. Future Imperfect,
Vide ExERC. XXVII.
Examples.
Ovj Ov-(T-oiuLevo ; (5ov\sv, j^ovXev-cr-ofxevo ; vejUy
ve/uL-ovjuevo ; ^rj<^tS, ^r}(lii-oviuLEVo.
I. PASSIVE.
The more beautiful oxen are led into the same
garden to be sacrificed. I admire the-man-who
is about to be freed (art. and fut. part.) from fear
* Dative.
O
146 GREEK EXERCISES.
and anxiety. The women about to be buried with
their children weep.
II. MIDDLE.
These are they who will attack us as we cross
over. In the mean time (say, in this) Cheiriso-
phus sends (some) of those from the village to
reconnoitre matters there. They ran outside to
see what (was) the row. We will advise those
who are about to obey him. The sailors are pre-
paring as diligently as possible to set sail to-
morrow. The king sends forward some soldiers
to take (possession of) the place. The goats were
driven together to feed in the field. The boy
will come to receive the other present. Cyrus
sends the soldiers to occupy the eminences be-
forehand.
3. Future Indefinite Passive.
Vide Exerc. XXVIII.
Examples.
\vy Xv-Brja-Ofievo ; CK-TrXij-y, SK-TrXay-Tjor-OjUfvo.
1. The slave who is about to be set free (loosed)
rejoices. Those who are about to be led to death
are afraid. The citizens will not oblige the
satraps who are about to be sent away. The
troops about to be thrown into confusion by the
enemies flee. We will defend the women about
to be pursued by the enemies.
GREEK EXERCISES. 147
2. Pity him who is about to be afflicted by
many evils. The men about to be sent away
have been conquered. The fruit of wisdom,
which will never be destroyed (say, never about
to be destroyed), is admired by all.
4. AoRisTS Passive.
Remark. For the mode of forming the Tense
Form of the aorists passive, vide Exerc. XXX.
The suffix of the participle is vt added to the
Tense Form, the r? being shortened into e.
The masc. and neut. participles are declined in
the same way as nouns of the consonant declen-
sion ; the nom. sing. masc. being made by adding
c, before which the vr go out, and the e becomes
el: thus, Xv, Xv-0-£vr; N.S. Xi»-0-£fc- The same
changes occur in the dat. plural. The neut. nom.
and ace. sing, is made by dropping the r ; e. g.
\v-0-evt
The fem. is made by the suffix craj before which
the same changes take place as in the nom. sing.
masc. ; e. g. Xv-O-ei-aa. It is declined like the
nouns comprised in Rule 2. Rem. 1. Exerc. VI.
1. Cyrus went away having been dishonoured.
The women went away, having incurred danger,
and having been dishonoured. We have over-
taken those left behind. The king, having been
enraged with the messenger, spoke thus. Having
148 GREEK EXERCISES.
been thrown into confusion, the beasts of burden
fled. Having been armed with breastplates, they
came. Cyrus, having been declared general,
comes to the army. Having been drawn up op-
posite, they killed as many of the plunderers as
possible (say, of those plundering). This girl
having been caught, told the king what had been
done in the battle (say, the things in the battle
done). To Phalynus, who had been sent (say,
having been sent) from the king, we gave this
advice (say, advised these things).
2. They, having been collected, came into the
park. The horsemen followed the barbarians
who had turned.* The soldiers, having been
freed from fear, fled. Having been maintained
by the cattle which they took from the Taochi,
the king's daughters remained in the country.
These things seemed fit to them, being assembled.
Cyrus orders Aristippus, having been reconciled
to those at home, to send away the army as se-
cretly as possible.t
5. First Aorist Middle.
Examples.
f5ov\eVf (5ov\ev-(Ta-/iiEvo ; veju, vufi-a-fx^vo.
Cheirisophus having sacrificed, led them along
the road. Having armed themselves and procured
* CTpicp. t iiQ fiaXlCTTa Kpvipaibjg.
GREEK EXERCISES. 149*
provisions, they began to ascend the more lofty-
mountains. Having packed up their baggage,
they immediately marched through deep (say,
much) snow, with (say, having) many guides.
Having prayed to the gods, and having-drawn-up
-in-order as for battle, they encamped in the
plain. The virgins had run-away, having hired a
boat from the village. These were those who had
routed the king. Then, having exhorted one
another, the bold women advance to the for-
tified place. The barbarians went away, having
answered nothing. The sheep having fed in the
meadow were slaughtered.
6. Second Aorist Middle.
Example.
Those about Ariaeus having turned away, w^ent
off another road. Having perceived the barba-
rians, the soldiers' wives pelted them with stones.
The children having perished had sunk in the sea.
And he, having taken hold of the right hand of
the king, spoke thus. A wind and storm having
arisen prevented them from setting sail. The
girl having inquired these things from the philoso-
pher, laughed. Having turned away, the youths
o 2
•150 GREEK EXERCISES.
went-off (some one way, and) others another
way.*
7. Perfect Participle.
Remark. This participle takes the redupHca-
tion and the suffix ij.evo or fieva.
For the particular rules respecting the redupli-
cation and the euphonic changes of the Crude
Form, see Exerc. XXXIII.
E^^amples.
Xv, Xt-Xu-JUEVO ; TptTTf TE-rpajUL-IHevO ; (TKEVaS,
£-(TKEva(T-iuevo ; aivt, yvti-fievo ; SrjXo ; Se-^tjXw-
-fiEvo : rajy rE-Tay-jiivo.
I. PASSIVE.
Those drawn up before the king were turned
(imperf.) to flight. The royal standard was an
eagle extended on a shield. These chariots had
scythes extended obliquely from the axles. Hence
Cyrus marches on one stage with the whole army
(dative without aw) drawn up together, both the
Grecian and the barbarian. They all had their
shields polished. The priest examines the entrails
when-taken-out. These things having been ex-
plained, no-longer seem unjust. I recognize these
things from the armour f (arms) which is buried
with (them). There they remained three days for-
the-sake of the wounded. The eminences (high-
banks) on which they (say, these) were drawn up
* Ace. t Dat.
GREEK EXERCISES. 151
were distant three or four plethra from the river.
They had thick ropes twisted round. They cut
off those of the Greeks who were scattered in the
plain. There were houses furnished with all-
sorts-of copper-vessels.^ And there were left also
both the (man) injured f in the eyes by the snow,
and the (man) who by-reason-ofj the cold had
had his toes ^ rotted off. When this phalanx was
broken up (say, this phalanx being broken up,
gen. abs.) he fled.
II. MIDDLE.
They cut off some of those-who-had-plotted
against the queen (art. and perf. part.). The
seers had declared that the battle would take
place (say, would be). I am conscious to myself
of having deceived him in nothing. The generals
praise the women who have chosen the beautiful
gifts.
8. Future Perfect Participle.
Vide ExERC. XXXV.
Examples.
\vf Xe-Xv-a-o-fxevo ; irpay, we-TTpa^-o-iJ.evo.
I. PASSIVE.
Few are those who will have been left. Many
* Dat. t ^t
X VTTO. ^ Say, fingers of the feet.
152 GREEK EXERCISES.
are those who will have been drawn up in the
plain. I pity those who will be imprisoned. The
things which will be sold are no longer in thy
power (tTTf (joi).
II. MIDDLE.
The priest reverences those who will have sacri-
ficed. He again roused up those about to rest
themselves. We are-anxiously-expecting those
who-will-get-possession-of the farm.
XLI. — The Dual Number of Nouns, Adjec-
tives, AND Participles, and of the Active
Verb.
Remark 1. The Greek language has a sepa-
rate set of inflections for words, when they refer
to two persons or things. These inflections which
are distinguished as the Dual Number, belonged
to the language in its earlier stages ; but as a
distinction so minute as that between two and
three is liable to be forgotten or neglected, so the
forms for expressing the distinction fell gradually
into disuse. In the older specimens of the lan-
guage the Dual Number occurs frequently; but
as we come down to the later authors it occurs
less and less frequently, until at length it is
wholly lost out of the language. A decisive proof
of this is the fact that Euclid, who writes with
mathematical precision, has not a single instance
GREEK EXERCISES. 153
of the Dual Number, even where he is speaking
of the two sides of a triangle, where it might have
added to the clearness of the demonstration ; but
it was not in the language of his day, and there-
fore he did not use it.
In the New Testament no Dual Form occurs.
There is no Dual in Modern Greek.
Remark 2. The following are the rules for the
formation of the dual number of substantives.
1. For the five cases of nouns the dual number
has only two forms : one for the nominative,
vocative, and accusative, and one for the genitive
and dative.
2. The nominative, vocative, and accusative
are made by adding e, and the genitive and
dative by adding iv to the Crude Form.
3. Nouns in o and a have the e contracted with
the o and a in the nominative, accusative, and
vocative ; o£ into w, ae into d ; thus, avOptj-rroB
becomes avOfjujTTu), and vaavtae becomes veavid :
and in the genitive and dative the i forms diph-
thongs with the a and o : thus, veavia-iv and
av9pii)Tro-iv.
4. When the Crude Form ends in a consonant,
u, or (, the nom. voc. and ace. is made bye affixed
to the Crude Form, without any other change
taking place ; thus, C. F. -^eXi^ov ' a swallow ;'
Dual, nominative, accusative, and vocative, x^'
Xl^ovb; but in the genitive and dative the tv is
lengthened into oiv, as, x^^^^o^^o^v-
154 GREEK EXERCISES.
The article, adjectives, and participles follow
the same rules. But the article and pronominal
adjectives almost always, and participles often,
use the same form for all three genders in the
nom. and ace. dual.
Remark 3. The following are the rules for
the formation of the dual of active verbs.
1. There is no first person dual.
2. The suffix for the 2nd person dual is tov in
all the tenses of all the moods. When the Tense
Form ends in a consonant, the connecting vowel
of the 2nd person dual is e, except in the sub-
junctive, which has t].
3. The suffix for the 3rd person dual in all the
tenses of the subjunctive, and in all the tenses of
the indicative, except the past tenses, is also tov :
in the past tenses of the indicative, and in all the
tenses of the optative (which also Sire past tenses)
its suffix is TYfv ; in the imperative it is twv. The
rule respecting the connecting vowel of the 2nd
person applies to all the suffixes of the 3rd
also.*
4. The regular vowel changes take place in the
dual of contract verbs.
Remark 4. As the dual is of rare occurrence.
* There is reason to think that in the Attic dialect the 2nd and
3rd persons dual were alike in the past tenses as well as in the
present and future, the suffix of both persons in the past tenses
being njv.
GREEK EXERCISES. 155
the exercises given upon it will be confined to the
tenses of the indicative.
1. Present Imperfect.
The two generals are come- The enemies are
burning both the tents of the two generals. The
youths bring the two horses to Orchomenos in
Boeotia. Ye two have the fortified place. Ye
two are seeking for the messenger in the park.
The two philosophers teach the two boys these
things. Ye two are explaining the law to the
judge. Both the bowmen hit the two marks.
2. Future.
Both the shepherds will come. The two old
men, with the two boys, will be ill. The two
slaves will carry the load into the house. The
two Greeks will report this to the commander.
The two slaves will clear the land. Both the
generals will remain in the tent. Ye will both
consider this an honour. Ye two will not care
for the war. The two vessels will sail away.
3. Perfect.
The old men have both died. Ye have both
learnt the Persian language. The two generals
have sacrificed in Aulis. The two kings have
enriched the commander. Ye two have punished
the priest. The shepherds have both fled out of
the field. The soldiers have burnt down the two
156
GREEK EXERCISES.
fortifications. The Greeks have both expended
the money.
4. Past Imperfect.
Ye two were writing the two letters in the tent.
Ye two were sending the messengers to Thebes.
The soldiers were burying the two commanders in
the plain. The youths both considered you to be
very skilful about nautical affairs.
5. Second Aorist.
Ye both left the country. The Persians fled
out of the two camps. The two boys had equal
shares allotted them. The commanders both
died in the battle. Ye two threw away the
shields.
6. First Aorist.
The two soldiers buried the generals in the i
plain. Ye two examined the house. The boys
both struck the sisters of the two messengers.
The two generals wrote the letters. Ye two J
burnt down some trees, and cut down others.
The Arcadians both sacrificed to Apollo. Ye
both remained seven days. The two slaves did
not sow equally in the two fields.
7. Past Perfect.
Ye had both learnt the Greek language. Ye
had both broken the truce. The two satraps had
sailed away to Ephesus. The two interpreters
had imitated us.
GREEK EXERCISES. 157
XLII. — The Dual Number of the Passive
AND Middle Verb.
Remark 1. The following are the rules for
the formation of the dual of the passive and
middle.
1. There is a form for the 1st person in all
the tenses of the indicative, subjunctive, and opta-
tive, except the aorists passive, which, as well as
the tenses of the imperative, both passive and
middle, have no 1st persons.
The suffix for the first person dual is jueOov.
Note. — The two following rules do not apply
to the aorists passive, which throughout have the
same suffixes for the 2nd and 3rd persons dual,
as in the active voice.
2. In all the tenses of all the moods the suffix
of the 2nd person dual is crdov.
3. The suffix for the 3rd person dual in all the
tenses of the indicative, except the past tenses,
and in all the tenses of the subjunctive, is the
same as that of the 2nd, viz. aQov. In the past
tenses of the indicative, and in all the tenses of
the optative it is o-^rjv. The suffix of the tenses
of the imperative is aOwv.
Remark 2. The connecting vowels of the ] st
person dual are the same as those of the 1st
person plural ; those of the 2nd and 3rd are the
same as those of the 2nd person plural.
Remark 3. The rules respecting the euphonic
p
158 GREEK EXERCISES.
changes in the perfect passive (Vide Exerc.
XXXIII.) of course apply to the dual number.
1. Present Imperfect,
passive.
We are both being sent by the king. Ye are both
being led to death. They are both being brought
up at the court of Croesus. Both of them are
said to be among the wisest of the Greeks.
MIDDLE.
We are both consulting concerning the safety
of the array. The two soldiers are fighting nobly
for their country. The two messengers are
choosing their arms. I
2. Future.
PASSIVE.
The two oxen will be sacrificed on the emi-
nences. The soldiers will both be left in the
plain. We shall both be compelled to do these
things. Ye will both be prevented from doing
this. They will both be hired by my father.
MIDDLE.
We shall both consult concerning these things.
Ye will both obey the king. The two armies will
march in the night. Ye will both pack up your I
baggage before the evening.
greek exercises. 159
3. Present Perfect.
PASSIVE.
We two have been brought up at the king's
gates. The two letters have been written by the
boy. The two stewards have been wounded by
the youth. The two generals have been con-
quered. Ye two have been taught to rule.
MIDDLE.
We two have learnt these things from the
deserters. The two slaves have tasted of Hberty.
The two armies have encamped near the bridge.
We have both been annoyed at your doing (say,
you doing ; gen. abs.) these things.
4. Future Perfect.
PASSIVE.
We shall both have been left behind by thee.
Ye will both have been sent to Corinth. The
two trees will have been cut down.
MIDDLE.
We shall both have dehberated well before the
work. Ye will both have rested. The two ar-
mies will have encamped in the plain.
5. Past Imperfect.
PASSIVE.
We were both admired by the soldiers. Ye
were both loved by Croesus. The two trees were
planted in the garden.
160 GREEK EXERCISES.
MIDDLE.
We both followed the laws. Ye both fought
boldly for your country. The two horsemen did
not perceive the plot against them.
6. Past Perfect.
PASSIVE.
We had both been taught to do these things.
Ye had both been wounded in the thigh. The two
letters had been written by the youth in Egyptian.
MIDDLE.
We had both hired the same servant. Ye
had both obliged us in these (points). The two
slaves had tasted of liberty.
7. AORISTS.
PASSIVE.
Ye were both sent by Cyrus to Tarsus. Ye
were both taught to write letters in Greek. The
two letters were explained by the Scythian. The
two generals were terrified.
MIDDLE.
1. We both vowed a sacrifice to Apollo. Ye
two, having walked from the camp to the sea,
rested. They both began to wonder when they
saw the splendour of the army.
2. We both perceived the plot. Ye both heard
of Cyrus from the king. The barbarians turned
to piracy.
161
APPENDIX.
I. — Some Irregular Nouns and Adjectives
Declined.
(3ov or (3o¥ 'ox.'
vav or vaF ' ship.'
Singular. Plural.
Singular.
Plural.
N. (iovQ, (3oeg.
N. vav-g,
vri-eg.
A. l3ovv, (SovQ, (Soag.
A. vav-v,
vav'g.
G. (3oog, (SoiSv.
G. va-cjgy
vt'Sjv.
D. /3ot, jSovffu
D. vri-'i,
vav-di.
Vide p. 96 for the declension of avep.
fitya 'great.'
Singular.
M.
F.
N.
N. fieyag,
lieyaXn,
Htya.
A. fxtyav,
fieyaXriv,
fxeya.
G. fieyaXoVf
fieyaXrjg,
{isyaXov.
D. fieyaXqt,
fityaXy,
[X(yaX(i>.
V. fisyaXe,
fieyaXr}
fieya.
The dual and plural are regularly formed from the Crude Form
fisyaXo or [xeyaXa.
TToXv
'many,' or ' much.'
Singular.
M.
F.
N.
N. TToXvg,
TroWj;,
TToXv.
A. TToXvv,
TToXXriVj
TToXv.
G. TTOXXOV,
TToXXrjg,
TToXXoV.
D. •n-oW^,
TToXXyy
TToXXtit.
The dual and plural are regularly formed from the Crude Form
TToXXo.
I
2
162 APPENDIX.
II. — Synopsis of the Rules of Formation of
THE Greek Verb.
1. Rules applicable to all the Voices.
1. The Increased Form is used only in the present and past
imperfect tenses of all the moods, and in the imperfect infinitive
and participle.
2. The augment belongs to the indicative only : the tenses which
take it are the past imperfect, the past perfect, and the aorists.
[For the rules relating to the augment, vide pp. 36, 37.]
3. The reduplication belongs to the perfect tenses, present,
past, and future, in aU the moods, and to the perfect infinitive
and participle. (Vide pp. 51, 52.)
4. The subjunctive tenses are distinguished from the corre-
sponding tenses of the indicative by long connecting vowels.
5. The tenses of the optative are distinguished from the corre-
sponding tenses of the indicative by the characteristic oi or t.
6. The Tense Forms of the subjunctive and optative are the
same as those of the indicative.
2. Terminations of the Active Voice, with the
connecting or characteristic vowels.
1. Indicative Mood.
Present Imperfect and Future.
Singular. Plural.
1 2 3 Ij 1 2 3
i.0 I ti-Q I «. || 0-fxev j £-r£ | ov-<n.
Past Imperfect, and Second Aorist.
O-V \ t'Q I £. II O-fliV 1 i-Tt I o-v.
first Aorist.
a I a-g \ c. || a-fiev | a-re \ a-v.
APPENDIX. 163
Present Perfect
Singular. Plural.
1 2 3 || 1 2 3
a \ a-g | f. |1 a-fiev \ a-re | a-ai.
Past Perfect,
ei-v I Ei-e I ei. Ij ei-fiev I ei-re I s-aav.
t] \ T)-g I £t. II e-)ttfv I e-re \ e-<Tav.
2. Subjunctive Mood.
All the Tenses fall being Present) .
ui j y-g j y. || lo-fxev \ rj-re \ w-cri.
3. Optative Mood.
All the Tenses except the \st Aorist (all being Past).
oi-fii I oi-g j 01. II oi-fiev \ oi-re | oi-tv.
First Aorist.
ai-fii 1 at-g \ ai. \\ ai-[itv | ai-re \ ai-tv.
4. Imperative Mood.
Imperfect, Perfect, and Second Aorist.
e-TOjaavor
O-VTUtV.
First Aorist.
a-rwerav
ora-vrti»v.
5. Infinitives.
Imperf., Future, and 2nd Aor., uv,
1st Aorist, a-i. Perfect, ev-ai.
6. Participles (Crude Forms).
Imperf., Fut. and 2nd Apr., o-vt (M. & N.), ovtra (F.).
1st Aor., a-vT (M. & N.), d-<7a (F.).
Perf. or (M. & N.), vta (F.).
164
APPENDIX.
3. Terminations of the tenses^ Sfc.f common to the j
Passive and Middle Voices, with the connecting \\
or characteristic vowels.
1. Indicative Mood.
Present Imperfect and Futures Imperfect and Perfect.
Singular. Plural.
1
2
3
1
2
3
-fiat
y
e-rai.
o-ntBa
f-<r06
o-vrai.
fiai
o-firjv
Present Perfect,
aai I rat. || iitQa j aOi
Past Imperfect.
s-<To, ov I £-T0. II o-fieOa \ e-ffOe
firiv
Past Perfect.
TO. II fieOa
(rOe
I vrai.
2. Subjunctive Mood.
Imperfect.
u)-fiaL J Ti'ffai, y \ ij-Tai. || oi-ynda \ T}-a9s | (o-vrai.
3. Optative Mood.
Imperfect and Future.
oi-fiijv I oi-(TO,oi-o I oi-ro. II oL-jxeOa \ oi-crOe \ oi-vTo.
N.B. The perfects of the subjunctive and optative are made by
the perfect participle and the subjunctive and optative of eg.
4. Imperative Mood.
Imperfect.
Singular.
12 3
£-(70, OV I £-(r9uj.
Plural.
2 3
e-ffOe I i-<j9b)<Tav
or i-aOtav.
APPENDIX. 165
Perfect.
Singular. Plural.
2 3
1 2 3
(T^e j (jOcjffav or
5. Infinitives.
AU but aorists and perfect, e-crOai. Perfect aOai.
6. Participles (Crude Forms).
All but aorists and perfect, o-fxevo (M. & N.), o-fieva (F.)
Perfect, fievo and fieva.
4. Terminations of the tenses^ Sec, peculiar to the
Passive Voice.
1. Indicative Mood.
Futures Indefinite.
Singular. Plural.
1 2 3 1 2 3
0-fji.ai I e-cai, I e-rai. o-jitQa I t-aQe j o-j/rat.
I e-«^y I 1 I
Aorists.
n-v I »;-C I 7?. II 7;-/i6i/ I 77-rc | ri-aav.
2. Subjunctive Mood.
Aorists.
w 1 ^i-e I y. II w-/x€v j ^-r£ I w-ai.
3. Optative Mood.
Futures Indefinite.
oi-/iqv I oi-(ro,ot*o I oi-ro. H oi-ixiQa \ oi-dOe | oi-vro.
166 APPENDIX.
Aorists.
Singular. Plural.
1 2 3
ei-T}-fxev I ei-i]-T€ \ n-ri-aav.
1 2 3
ti-ri-v J ii-ri-Q I £1-?;.
4. Imperative Mood.
Aorists.
I ri-Qi I j;-rw. || . . | jy-re | -q-Tioaav.
N.B. As the 1st aorist has the suffix Qr}, the termination Qi is
in that tense changed into ti.
5. Infinitives.
Aorists, 'q-vai: Futures Indefinite, e-aOai,
6. Participles (Crude Forms).
Aorists, e-vT (M. & N.), et-(ra (F.).
Futures Indefinite, o-fiivo (M. & N.), o-fieva (F.).
5. Terminations of the tenses, ^c, peculiar to the
Middle Voice.
1. Indicative Mood.
i^'iVs/ Aorist.
Singular. Plural.
12 3 12 3
a-firjv I a-ffOf aOy I a-ro. a-fieOa I a-o-0£ | a-vro.
I <^ I !
Second Aorist.
o-firiv I e-(xo, eo, I e-ro. j[ o-}iiBa | e-cr06 | o-vto.
2. Subjunctive Mood.
(ti-fiai I j;-(rat, y | ri-rai. \\ u}-iis9a | jy-cr^e j cj-vrai.
APPENDIX.
167
1
ai-fiT]v
3. Optative Mood.
First Aorist.
Singular. Plural.
ai-(TO,
ai-o
3
ai-TO.
1 2 3
ai-fieOa I ai-aOe I ai-vro.
Second Aorist.
oi-fii}v I oi-aOyOi-o I ot'TO. II oi-fieOa | oi-aOe
4. Imperative Mood.
i^ir«^ Aorist.
a-aBix). II
Second Aorist.
e-<jB(j}. II
a-(T06
.(T0£
a-crOuxrav
or a-aQ(av.
s-(T9(t)ffav
or e-(T9<i)v.
5. Infinitives.
1st Aorist, a-aQai. 2nd Aorist, e-aOai.
6. Participles (Crude Forms).
1st Aorist, a-fitvo (M. & N.), a-fitva (F.).
2nd Aorist, o-/i£vo (M. & N.), o-fisva (¥.).
6. Suffixes of the tenses.
Future Imperfect (Active, Passive, and Middle), q. Verbs in
X^ fi, V, p generally do not take g, but have person-endings con-
tracted with f .
1st Aorist (Active and Middle), aa. Verbs in \, {i, v, p add
a only, and strengthen the vowel of the Crude Form.
Present Perfect (Active), a, d, or ku.
Past Perfect (Active), et or r] ; d or rj ; kh or kt}.
Aorists (Passive), 1st Oij, 2nd r].
Futures Indefinite (Passive), 1st 9t]-(t, 2nd i/-(t.
168 APPENDIX. ♦
Putxire Perfect (Passive and Middle), same as future imperfect
active.
No other tenses have suffixes, but are distinguished either by
prefixes, or by the personal terminations.
III. Verbs in MI.
Remark 1. Verbs in jui (so called because the 1st person sin-
gular of the pres. imperf. indie, act. ends in fii — the old termina-
tion) are a class of verbs ending in a, f, i, o, or v, which generally
form the present and past imperfect tenses of aU the voices, and
the 2nd aorist active and middle, without connecting vowels:
they differ also from the ordinary verbs in several other respects.
Some verbs, most of which end in a consonant, are lengthened in
the present by the addition of the syllable w, and they are, in
that tense, declined like verbs in fii, but they have no 2nd aorist,
nor do they take the prefix mentioned in Remark 2,
Remark 2. In the present and past imperfect tenses they
generally receive a prefix consisting of t, before which, in verbs
beginning with a consonant, this consonant, or if it is an aspirate,
the corresponding smooth letter, is repeated. To the roots e and
(TTtty I only is prefixed witli the rough breathing (t).
Remark 3. The following are the rules for the formation of
these verbs in the active voice.
1. Indicative.
1. Present Imperfect.
Singular. Plural.
12 ^ 11 1 2 3
Personal terminations \ /xi \ g \ <n. \\ fiev \ ts \ aai.
In the singular the vowel of the Crude Form is lengthened
before the personal terminations.
2. Past Imperfect.
The augment is regularly prefixed.
Personal terminations | v | f | none. || fiiv \ rs \ aav.
APPENDIX. ' 169
The verbs Oe * put,' do 'give,' and e * send,' do not form then-
singular number without connecting vowels, so that they have the
regular terminations of contract verbs.
Verbs increased with vv do not form the 1st person singular with-
out a connecting vowel, and often have one in the 2nd and 3rd.
As in the present, the vowel of the Crude Form remains short
in the plural.
3. Second Aorist.
Singular. Plural.
1. 2. 3. I 1. 2. 3.
Personal terminations | J^ | C | none. |j fiev \ re | trav.
The augment is prefixed in the regular way.
In the plural as well as in the singular the vowel of the Crude
Form is lengthened, except in the verbs 9t and do, which more-
over, as well as k, have no singular in the 2nd aorist.
2. Subjunctive.
Imperfect and Second Aorist.
Singular. Plural.
1. 2. 3. w 1. 2. 3.
Personal terminations | w | yc 1 V' \\ iJ^H-^v j ^^£ 1 wo't'
The a and t of the Crude Forms are lost in the w and rj. But
ow and otj are both contracted into a> ; as, 2nd aor. cw, d(^Q, d<^,
diofiev, daJTS, doJai.
3. Optative.
Imperfect and Second Aorist.
Personal terminations r Singular. Plural,
with modal charac- J 1. 2. 3. ii 1. 2. 3.
teristic L ir]-v | iij-g \ irj. \\ irj-fiev | irj-re | uj-aav.
The vowels of the Crude Forms are not lengthened. In the
plural the rj is often omitted in the 1st and 2nd persons, and con-
sidered as contracted with the preceding diphthong. In the 3rd
person plural most commonly rjcav is made ev : e.g. Sidol-fxev,
hdol-Tt, didoX-ev.
Q
170 ' APPENDIX.
4, Imperative.
Imperfect and Second Aorist.
Singxilar. Plural.
r Smgxilar.
I 1. 2. 3.
Personal termina- I 1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 3.
tions I , . I 01 I TO). . . \ Ts \ vTbJv, or rwaav
III II {TiOv).
In the imperfect the vowels of the Crude Forms remain short,
and the 2nd person singular is rarely made in the regidar form :
the termination is generally dropped, and the vowel of the Crude
Form is contracted with the connecting vowel e ; e. g. o/ivv for
ofiviiQi, lOTTj for i(TTa9i.
In the 2nd aorist a is changed into rj, but £ and o remain un-
changed.
The Tense Forms 6e and £o and compounds of e change 9i
into g.
5. IXFINITIVE.
Imperfect and Second Aorist.
The suffix is -vat.
In the imperfect the vowels of the Crude Forms remain short.
In the 2nd aorist a becomes rj ; e, ei ; o, ov.
6. Participles.
Imperfect and Second Aorist.
The suffix is vr (M. & N.), and the fem. is made by a further
suffix era.
The participles are regularly declined.
Remark 4. The following are the rules for the formation of
these verbs in the present and past imperfect passive and middle.
The vowels of the Crude Forms are short throughout, except in
the subjunctive.
1. Indicative.
The terminations for both tenses are the same as in the ordinary
verbs.
APPENDIX.
171
2. Subjunctive.
The terminations are the same as in the ordinary verbs.
Vide Remark on the subjunctive active.
Personal endings
with modal cha-
racteristic
3. Optative.
Singular.
Plural.
1. 2. 3.
i-fie9a I i-(jO( I L-vTO.
4. Imperative.
Singular. Plural.
1. 2. 3. I 1. 2. 3.
Personal endings | . . | c70 | (r9io. \ . . \ a9e \ a9wv or aOujaav.
In the 2nd sing, the <r is omitted, and the ordinary contraction
takes place.
5. Participle.
Suffix fievo (M. & N.), fieva (F.).
6. IXFINITIVE.
Suffix crOai.
Remark 5. Second Aorist Middle. The suffixes are pre-
cisely the same as in the tenses common to the passive and middle,
the only distinction being, that the 2nd aorist middle is of course
made from the simple root without the prefix.
IV. — Formation of the other Tenses of
Verbs in MI.
Remark 1. With the following exceptions, these are formed
regularly, as from verbs in a, e, o, andu.
Remark 2. The aorist and future passive take a short vowel
in the root throughout ; but the present and past perfect generally
have it long.
172 APPENDIX.
Remark 3. The verbs 9e, e, and co have an irregular 1st
aorist active made by the suffix ku ; but these forms are confined
to the indicative mood. In consequence, probably, of their simi-
larity to the present perfect, that tense in the verbs 9t and t
changes the t into ei, instead of ?;, before the suffix Ka.
VOCABULARY.
REMARKS ON THE MODE OF USING THE
VOCABULARY, ETC.
1. When, as frequently happens, several Greek words are given
for one English word, it is to be distinctly remembered that, as a
general rule, they cannot be used indiscriminately in translating
the exercises : before selecting any one of these words the pupil
must consider, first, whether the form of the Greek word is such
as to bring it under the rule to which the exercise he is translating
belongs, or under any previous rule ; and, secondly, whether it
bears the particular meaning attached to the English word which
he is to translate, Thus, in any of the exercises previous to the
seventeenth no substantive or adjective ending in a consonant can
be used : in any previous to the twenty-sixth no middle verb is
to be employed ; and so on with other classes of words. Again,
suppose the English word is "fearful," for instance, the pupil
must consider whether that word is, in the given instance, used in
an active or in a passive sense, that is, whether it means ' 'dreadful ,
fear-causing," or " timid, subject to fear ;" because on this it de-
pends which of two Greek words is to be employed. The neces-
sary explanations on such points are in all cases given with the
words in the Vocabulary, the meaning of the English words being
explained by other words following them in parentheses. It can
hardly be needful to add, that attention must of course be paid to
the distinction between nouns and verbs, prepositions and adverbs,
&c., when a word in English belongs to different parts of speech.
Similarly, when the Crude Form of a vei'b is said to be used
only in some particular tenses, care must be taken not to form
from it any other tenses : this remark will often determine which
of several Greek words is to be used.
Q 2
1 74 VOCABULARY.
2. WTiere no mention is made of the gender of substantives,
they are masculine, except in the following cases :
Crude Forms ending in <Tvva, <n, or tijt are feminine ; those
ending in jiiar are neuter.
3. The comparative and superlative of adverbs are not given, as,
in most cases, the former is expressed by the singular, the latter
by the plural accusative of the neuter adjective in the comparative
or superlative degree.
4. When several English words in the exercises are to be ex-
pressed by one Greek word, the rule generally adhered to has been
to put down the principal word in its alphabetical place in the
vocabulary : otherwise, to place the phrase according to the first
letter of the first word in it : sometimes both plans have been ob-
served ; thus " with the aid of" will be found twice in the voca-
bulary ; once under the word ** aid," and again under " with."
5. The following are the abbreviations used in the vocabulary.
ace, accusative, "] used after Greek words to denote that such
dat., dative, > words are followed by these cases of words
gen., genitive, J dependent upon them.
adv., adverb.
c. (after a Greek adjective), common, i.e. having the same form
for the feminine as for the masculine,
comp., comparative,
conj,, conjunction,
f. (after a Greek noun), feminine.
F. (after adjectives), feminine,
in trans., intransitive.
M. (after adjectives), masculine,
m. (after a Greek verb), middle.
N. (after adjectives), neuter.
N.S. (after nouns), nominative singular,
n. (after an English word), noun,
n. (after a Greek noun), neuter,
part., participle,
plu. , plural — denotes that the Greek word is not to be used in
the singular,
prep., preposition,
sing., singular, denotes that the Greek word is not to be used in
the plural,
sup., superlative,
trans., transitive.
V. (after an English word), verb.
VOCABULARY. 175
Greek letters in parentheses coming after the Crude Forms, de-
note the Increased Forms.
6. Some verb roots occur so frequently, either in their simple
state, or in combination with prepositions, that it is of importance
to know their principal Tense Forms ; the following is a list of such
of them as are irregular, the prefixes belonging to the tenses in the
indicative being in all cases given, as they are in the vocabulary also.
ay ; 2nd aor. act. t]yay.
aipt ; 2nd aor. formed from another root (tX) tiX. ; aor. pass.
yptQr].
(Sa ((3aiv) ; fut. (3r](T(ofiai) ; 2nd aor. e(3rt.
j8a\(\X) ; perf. act. jSejSXTjica ; perf. pass. jSejSX?; ; aor. pass.
yev (yiyv) ; fut. ysvrja ; 1st perf. yeyevij ; 2nd perf. yeyova.
do {diSoj) ; 1st aor. edojKa ; aor. pass. eSoOi] (vide appendix).
£ * send ;' 1st aor. tjku ; perf. tl/ca (vide appendix).
tpX, used only in pres. and past imperf. ; fut. (Xeva(oixai) ; 2nd
aor. r]\9 ; perf. e\7]\v9a.
e% ; fut. f ^ ; imperf. ei^ ; perf. ecrxrjKu; 2nd aor, ecr^ ; 1st aor.
pass. f(T%£07/.
Kpi {kdIv), perf. act. KSKpiKa ; perf. pass. KSKpi ; aor. pass. SKpiOr],
KTSv (kteiv) ; 1st aor. act. eKrava ; 2nd aoi*. SKrav- ; perf. act.
eKTova and t/cra/ca ; 1st aor. pass. tKTaOt].
Xaj3 (XajUjSai/) ; fut. Xjji//(oy^tat) ; 2nd aor. fXa/3 ; perf. eiXrjcpa ;
perf. pass. eiXrjfB ; aor. pass. e\r}(p9rj.
Xey ; perf. pass. XeXey ; in compounds, perf. act. eiXoxa • perf.
pass. eiXfy.
TEfx {rffiv) ; 2nd aor. act. fra/i- or tre/n- ; perf. act. TSTfxijKa ;
aor. pass, er^rj^// ; perf. pass, tet^t}.
Tsv (reiv) ; perf. act. re-TciKa ; perf. pass. Terd ; 1st aor. pass.
ETuOlJ.
Tpe(p ; fut. act. Ope^ ; 1st aor. act. eOpetpa ; perf. Tsrpocpa ; 1st
aor. mid. eQpctpa- ; 2nd aor. pass, trpa^ij ; perf. pass. r£-
6pa(p-.
Tvx {Tvyx(iv) ; fut. act.r£u^(o/xai) ; perf. act. reTvxVK^^i 2nd
aor. ervx-'
(pep, used in some of the tenses only, the others being formed from
various roots ; fut. act. oicr : 1st aor. act. rjveyKa ; 2nd aor.
act. rjveyK ; perf. act. evrjvoxct ; fut. pass. oicrOrjcr, or €V£%-
6i](T', 1st aor. r]vexOr] ; perf. evrjvey.
(pvy {(psvy) ; fut. act. (piv%{oiiai) ; perf. Tre^evya ; 2nd aor. t(j>vy.
176
VOCABULARY.
A.
Ability, dvvam, f.
Abie, iKcivo
About (around), Trfpi, ace.
About (nearly), afKpi, ace.
About, be ; be going to ; be to,
fieX (XX), followed by infin.
Abstain, a7r-£%, m.
Abundance, a-^9ov-ia, f.
Accomplish, fcdra-Trpay (<T<r)
According to, Kara, ace.
Account of, on, cia, ace.
Accuse, dia-l3a\ (XX)
Accustom, £0i^(^)
Acquainted with, tn-ireipo, gen.
Acquire, Kva, m.
Across, TTfjOa, Trepdv, gen.
Act, TTjOay ((Tc), ttou
Act unjustly, a-£iK6
Action, epyo, n.
Additional settler, ett-oiko
Administer, diairpay {(T(t), m.
Administer, Trpay
Admire, OavfiaT (Z)
Admit, ofio-Xoye, m.
Advance, irpoa-fiaX (XX)
Advise, cvfi-^ovKiv, $ov\ev,
dat. of person, ace. of thing
Advocate, avv-rjyopo
Aegina, Aiylva, f.
Aeneas, Aiveia
Affair, Trpdyfiar
Afflict, 7rXj;y (ttXt/o-ot)
Afraid, be, Sei
(pofSe, (passive)
Afraid of, be, rpe, ace.
After (time), fitra, ace.
Again, avOig, ttoXiv
Against, TrpoQ, tizL, ace.
Agamemnon, Ayafxe/xvov
Agesilaus, AyriaiKao
Agriculture, yewpyia, f.
Aid of, with the, aw, dat.
All, iravT (M. &N.), irdaa (F.)
All sorts of (adj.), Trafi-TroXXo
Alliance, (rvfi-fia-xia, f.
Allotted one, have, Xax (Xoy-
Allow, ea
Ally, <TVfjL-fiax-o
Alms (literally pity), eXerifio-
avva, sing.
Alone, iiovo
Along, (prep.) rrdpa., Kara, ace.
Already, rjCij
Also, Kai (stands second)
Always, aei
Ambassador, Trpec/Sewra in sing.
irptcfjiv in plur.
Among, iv, dat.
Anchises, Ay^Tcra
Anchor, ayKvpa, f.
And, Kai
Anger, opya, f.
Animal, C^o, n.
Annoyed at, be, x^^^'^^Q ^^p.
(dat. or ace), axQ-{i), m.
dat.
Another, aXXo
Answer, vide Reply
Anxiety, jxepifiva, f.
Any, 7-12^ (n. nom. sing., tl)
Anything, neuter of tlv
Apollo, AttoXXuiv
Appear, (pav {<paiv) m. (aor.
etpavrj)
Apple, f.i)]Xo, n.
Appoint, ray (era)
Approach (v.), irap-iXO
Approach (n.), s<p-oco, f.
Arcadian, ApKad
Ariaeus, Apiaio
Arise, ysv, m.
Arm (weapon), ottXo, n.
Arm (v.), ottXic (Z)
Arm oneself, t^-07rXid (2), m.
Armament, oroXo
Armenia, Apfxtvia, f.
Army, arpdro, arpdria, f.,
arpdTtvfxaT
Arrange, Koafit
Arrive, a(p~iK (iKve), m.
Arrow, To^ev/xaT
VOCABULARY.
177
Artaxerxes, Apra^epKa
Artist, rexvlTa
As, ojg
As if, cjg
As-many-as, oao
Ascend, dvd-f3a {(3aiv), (m.
fut. j3r](T0fiai), with eif
Ashamed, be, aia^vv (passive)
Ask (inquire), tpojra
Ask for, aLTS (2 ace.) *
Ass. ovo
Assemble (trans.) aOpoid (?)
Assemble (intrans.), crvv-tXO
Assembly, tKKXrjcrLa, f., ayopa,
f.
Assert, laxvpio (?), m.
Assist, (rvfi-Trpaj
Assistant, vTrrjpsTa
Astonishment, strike with, fK-
TrXrjy (ccr)
At, irpog, tTTi, dat., when no
motion is implied ; otherwise,
irpoQ, fTTi, eiQ, with the ace.
At the same time, djia (dat.)
Athene (Minerva), AOrjva, f.
Athenian, AOrjvaio
Athens, A9r]va (plu.)
Attack (n.), f7ri-0op-a, f.
Attack (v.) ewL-cpep (m.), btti-
KSi (m.)
Attendant, virripiTa, irpoawoXo,
OepUTTOVT
Attica, AttIku, f.
Aulis, AvXt.8, f.
Avarice, TrXeovt^ia, f.
Aware, be, fxaO (fiavOav)
Away, be, aTr-tc
Axle, a^ov
B.
Back (adv.), iraXiv
Bad, Ka.Ko
Banished, be, iK-Trer (iri-rrT),
(perf. TTt-iTTuj-Ka) : (pvy
(^evy) ace.
Bank, high, oxBa,{.
Barbarian, ^ap^apo
Barbaric, f3apf3apiKo
Barber, Kovpev (ef.)
Bare, make, \plXo
Base, aiaxpo
Battle, fidxa, f.
Be, £<T
Be present, or here, Trdp-etr
Bear (n.) apKTo, m. &f.
Beast of burden, v7ro-^vyio, n.
Beautiful, koXo
Beauty, KaXXeg, n.
Bee, fieXi<T(ra, f.
Beech-tree, (ptfyo, f.
Before (adv. time), Trpiv (av is
added when Trpiv is used with
the subjunctive
Before (prep.), Trpo, gen.
Beggar, ttt^xo
Begin (at the beginning), apx,
m. gen.
Begin (do first or before an-
other), apx (active)
Beginning, apxa, f.
Being (part.), ovt (M. & N.),
ovaa (F.)
Behold, 9eu)pe
Believe, ttkttsv, dat.
Benefit (v.) ojcpeXe
Best, apicrro
Better, afutvov
Beware of, (pvXaK {(T(t), m. ace.
Beyond, Trepa, f^w, gen.
Bid, order, KeXev
Bird, opvW or opvi
Birth, yeveg, n.
Bite (v.) SaK (drjK)
Blame (v.), /tteyu^, m., dat. of
person, ace. of thing
Blow, (n.) TrXrjya, f.
Boar, Kairpo
Boast, (v.), £7r-fv%, m.
Boat, ttXoio, n.
Boeotia, Botwna, f.
Bold, OappaXeo
Boldly, yevvaiojg
Bolt (n.), KXy9po, n.
Book, ]8ij3\o, f.
178
VOCABULARY.
Both — and, kul — /cai, re — 7f,
re — Kai ; te is an enclitic.
Both sides, from, tKarepixjOiv
Boundary, dpo
Bow (n.), To^o, n.
Bowman, ro^ora
Box, Kiara, f.
Boy, Trai^
Brave, ayaQo, sup. apitrro
Break, icar-ay, 2nd perf. fcar-
eaya
Break-up, dia-ff-rra (<t in perf.)
Breast, fiaaro
Breast-plate, 9o)paK
Bride, vvfi<pa
Bridge, yecpvpa, f.
Bring, (pep, ico/ii^ (^)
Bring in, ftcr-ay
Bring up (rear), rpecp, fut. act.
Ope-i//, fut. pass, regular
Broad tvpv (M. & N.), evpeia
(F.)
Brother, aceX(f)0
Build, iSpv
Bull, ravpo
Burn, Kai (pres. and past imp.
all the other tenses, Kav)
Burn down (or up), Kara-Kai
(kuv)
Bury, 9a<p (ttt)
Bury with, (Tvv-9a<p (ttt)
Bustard, cjTid, f.
But, aXXa
Buy, ayopad ('0
By (after a passive verb, and
before the word denoting the
living agent), vtto, gen.
C.
Call (name or summon), KciXe
(perf. KeKXijKa), e not length-
ened in fut. and aor.
Call-together, (rvy-KaXe
CaU out, (pOeyy, m.
Camel, KafxrjXoj f.
Camp, crTpdroTredo, n.
Canal, diujpvxt f.
Captain, Xoxdyo
Capture, XajS (Xri(3)
Carduchian, Kapdovxo
Care for, (ppovrid (?), gen.
Carriage, ap[xdna^a, f.
Carry, ^fp (used only in pres.
and past, itnperf.)
Carry, bring, ko/xiS (iC)
Carry-off, dpirad (^)
Carv5? yXvip
Cast-lots, kXt]po, m.
Castolus, KacTTojXo
Catch (vide Take), Xa/3 {Xr^jS)
Cattle, KTTjvsg, n. plu.
Cave, avrpo, ainiXaio, n.
Cease, Xj^y ; ttuv (m.), both
followed by participle.
Cerameicus, KepafJieiKo
Certainly, StjXovoti
Chariot, ci/xaKa, f.
Charioteer, r/vioxo
Chastise, KoXad (K)
Cheerfully, rideujg
Cheirisophus, Xeipi(To<j>o
Cherry-tree, Kepdao, f.
Child (correlative to parent),'.
TeKvo, n.
(correlative to adult), irai-
Sio, n.
Choose, ctLpe (m.), 2nd aor. aX
Chosen, alpero
Cilicia, KtXiKia
Cilician (n.), KiXiic
Cilician woman, KiXttro-a
Circumstance, Trpdyfiar
Citadel, UKpa, f.
Citizen, TroXTra
City, TToXi, f.
Class (n.), Kdrd-Xoyo
Clear (v.), Kdddp {aip)
Clearchus, KXtapxo
Clever, tTTi-arrifJiov
Close-chariot, dpfxdfia^a, f.
Closely, iyyvg, sup. tyyvrarw
Clothing, £<t6t]t, f.
Cohort, Xoxo
Cold (adj.), xl^vxpo
VOCABULARY.
179
Cold(n.), ■<pvx^Q,ri.
Collect, ayep (up) (perf. Tjyrj-
yepica), evv-ay (perf. ayr^-
oxa), cfvX-Xey (perf. avv-ei-
Xox")
Colonist, aTT-oiKO
Come, ?/K (no perf. or aor.)
, e\9 (used only in 2nd
aor.)
, epx (m., used only in
pres. and past imperf.)
Come (arrive), a^i/c {lkvs), m.
, irapd-ytv (yiyj^)?
m.
Come together, avv-eXO^ avv-
Come to terms with, Kura-Xv,
m., followed by Tvpog
Command (v.), apx, gen.
,77yf, m., dat.
Commander, apxovr
Commander of a village, kwju-
apxa
Commit (intrust), eiri-Tpi-K
Communicate together, koivo,
m.
Compel, dvayKud (?)
Complete (adj.), reXeio
Completely, reXsMQ
Conceal, Kpixp (ttt)
Concede, avy-x(ope (gen.)
Concerning, Trepi, gen.
Conclude a truce, ctrivd, m.
aor. e-<7'KU(T
Confess, Ojuo-Xoyg, m.
Confiscate, aTro-arjfiav {aiv), m.
Conflict, dfiiXXa, f.
Confusion, throw into, rdpax
Conjecture, eiKao (0
Conquer, v'lKa
Conscious, be, avv-oi^a (perf.
with pres. signification, fol-
lowed by participle agreeing
with the subject, and the dat.
of the reflexive pronoun)
Consent (n.), yvcjfia, f.
Consider, vofiiS (?)
Constitution, TroXlreia, f.
Consult, liovXev, m.
Consult with, (ru/x-jSovXav, m.
Continue, ^ J a- ye J/, m., fut. dia-
yevT](T
Contribute, (TVfi-fSaX (XX), m-
Contrive, firjxdva, m.
Converse, ^la-Xey, ra., (aor.
pass. Si'SiXexOn) dat.
Copper-vessel, x(^XKu)fiaT
Corinth, KopivOo
Corinthian, Kopiv9io
Corn, (tIto
Correct (adj.) op9o
Correctly, opOojg
Couch, evva, f.
Country, xwpa, f.
Country, native, Trarpid, f.
Courage, avSpuoTrjT
Court of, at the, Trapa, dat.
Cowardice, Kaicia, f.
Cowardly, /ca/co
Creditor, xP'n^Ta
Credulous, evireifTTO (c.)
Croesus, Kpotco
Cross (v.), dia-(3a ((3aiv)
Crow (n.), KopuK
Crowd (n.), oxXo
Crown (v.), ot£0
Cruel, w/io
Cure (v.), OtpcLTrev
Cut, Kdrd-TEfi (rtjLtv.), (perf.
TeTfir]-Ka, 2nd aor. trdfi)
Cut-off, aTTO-TtfJ,
Cut down, KCLTd-KOTT (r)
Cut off, aTTO-KOTT (r)
Cyrus, }Lvpo
D.
Damage, without doing, aaivuiq
Damsel, Kopa (nom. in rji)
Dancing (n.), opxr]QfJio
Danger, Kivdvvo
Dangerous, Kiv^vvixjoeg
Danger, fond of, cpiXo-Kiv^vvo
Danger, be in, or incur, Kivbvvtv
180
VOCABULARY.
Darius, Adpeio
Dark, crKOTaivo
Daughter, Qvyartp ; vide p. 96.
Day, vfifpa, f.
Day-break, afxa ry rj^epq.
Days of old, in the, TraXai (adv.)
Dead, viKpo
Dear, (fiko
Death, Qavaro
Death, putto, a7ro-a<pay (?or tt)
Debtor, o0£iXfra
Deceitful, doXepo
Deceive, arraTa
Deceive (disappoint) ipEvd, m.
Declare, aTro-deiK
Decree (v.), v^>70i^, m.
Deep,/3a0y (M. & N.), (SaOua
(F.)
Deer, SopKao, f.
Defeat (Iiterallycrush),(v.),0pai»
Defence, UTro-Xoyia, f.
Defend, afivv, dat.
Defend oneself, <pvXaK {(T(t)
Delay (v.), dia-Tpij3 (1/3) m.
Deliberate, (iovXev, m.
Delicious, tjdv (M.&N.), -^deia
(F.)
Delos, At]Xo, f.
Delude, air-d^ (-a^KT/c)
Demand (v.), aire
Depart, aTro-xwpe
Depopulate, fp?;/io
Desert (n.), tprjixo, f.
Deserter, avrofioXo
Desire (v.), xpy^ (0
Desire (n.), eiri-Bvuia, f.
Despatch (v.), a7ro-o-r£\(\\)
Destroy, <p9tp {eip)
Devise, fSovXev
Die, 6av {9vi](tk), fut, mid.
perf. Te-9vr]ica, 2nd aor. aTr-
E^av : — TfXtvra |
Difficulty, a-TTopia, f. j
Difficulty, with (adv.), wovijpojQ j
Dig, op^x i'^^X I
Diligent, CTrovdaio
Diligently, awovdanog I
Dinner, ^mrvo, n.
Disciple, ixddi]Ta
Discipline, ra^'t ( =ray-(n), f.
Discourse (n.), Xoyo
Disease, voao, f.
Disgraceful, aio-xpo
Dishonour (n.), a-Tifiia, f.
Dishonour (v.), a-fiiia^{Z,)
Dismount, Kara-^a {(Sulv)
Displeased, be, ax^, aor. »jx^-
Disposition, good, ev(pv'ia
Dispute (v.) aix(j)i<rj3r]Te
Distant, be, air-ex
Distribute, ve/x
Ditch, raippo, f. opvyfiar
Do, TToie, Trpay {aa)
Dog, Kvv, for nom. s. kvov
Door, 0iipa, f.
Double, ciTTO
Doubt (n.), afi<pi-(3oX-ia, f.
Doubt, be in, a-Trope
Dove, TTtpidrepa, f.
Draw up, ray ((r<r)
Draw up opposite, avri-ray, or
avri-7rapa-ray
Draw up in order, avv-Tay
Drawing up of troops (n.), ra^t
(y<Ti)
Dreadful, deivo
Drink (n.) ttoto
Drink up, sk-tto (for perfects
and 1st aor. passive)
Drown, Trvly
Dry up, $?jpav ()it in perf. pass.)
Dust, Kovia, f.
Dwell, otK£
Each, eKUfTTO
Eager, Trpo-9vp,o
Eagerly, rrpoGvfKjjg
Eagerness, TrpoBvfxia, f.
Eagle, atTo
Ear, wr (n.), N.S. ovg
Earthquake, auafio
Easily, p^Sicjg
VOCABULARY.
181
Easy, p^dio, sup. paaro
Education, TraiCeia, f.
Egyptian, AiyvTrrio
Egyptian, in (adv.), Atyurr-
Either party, UaTtpo (plu.)
Eldest, irpecriSvraTo
Elephant, eXE(pavT
Else (adj.), aXXo
Embalm, rdplx^v
Emerald, afidpaydo, f.
Eminence, uKpo, n.
Emulate, ^ijXo
Encamp, (TrpdroTrthv, m.
Encircle, (TTe<p
End (cease), ttuv, m.
Endeavour (v.), ireipa, m.
Enemy (public), TroXt/Jiio
Enemy (personal), exOpo
Enquire, make enquiry, epojTa
Enrage, opyi8 {'C), dat.
Enrich, 7rXovri8 (^)
Enrol, ey-ypaf
Ensnare, ev-eSpev
Enter, €/x-/3a {j3aiv). eLC-eXO
(only as 2nd aor.)
Entertain, ^evic (?)
Entrails, iepo (n. plu.)
Entrance, ei<T-oCo, f.
Ephesus, E(pe(To
Ephor (a Spartan magistrate),
£0-OjOO
Equal, ICO, bp.oio
Equally, ofidXcog
Equal in age, rjXlKiuJTa
Escape, airo-dpa (diSpacTK), fut.
mid. with a : airaXXay
Escape the notice of, Xa9 (Xav-
6av), ace.
Estate, %WjOio, n.
Euphrates, 'Ev<ppdTa
E\irope, EujOWTra, f.
Even (conj.), kui
Evening, ^£tXa, f., ka7rtpa,i.
Evident, ^?jXo, (pdvepo
Evident, make, drjXo
Evil (bad), kuko t
Evil-doer, KUKOvpyo
Examine, (XKOTrt ; (in the pas-
sive) epsvva
Exclude, uTT-eipy ; in perf. im-
perat. a is inserted.
Exhort, Trapd-KsXev, m.
Exile (n.), (pavyovT
Expect, eX-iS (?)
Expect anxiously, K&pddoKe
Expedition, oroXo, aTpdreia, f.
Expedition, make an, arpdrev
join in an, cv-arpdrtv
Expelled, be, e/c-Trrw (for perfect)
Expend, cdirdva
Explain, ^rfXo ; <ppa8 (?)
Extend, dvd-rev (perf. to)
Eye, ocpBaXfio
F.
Faction, one of an opposite,
avTi-ffra-ffiojTa
Faithful, TTiaro
Faithfulness, TTLdTO-rrjT
Faithless, a-7n<jTo
Fall (v.), 7rfr(7ri7rr) (perf. tttoj)
False, }pevSeg
Famished, X'lfiujSeg
Far, fxuKpo
Far as, as, fisxpL, gen.
Farewell, (Uterally, rejoice) xdp
(aip)
Fare well, ev irpay
Farm, xwpa, f.
Farmer, yewpyo
Fast (adv.), raxv, sup. Tdxi<TTa,
comp. Qadcrov
Father, Trarep ; vide p. 96
Favourable, kuXo
Fear (n.), ^o/3o
Fear (v.), Seid^Se (dat)
Fearful (timid), (bo^epo
Fearful (dreadful), hivo
Fearfully, deiviog
Feed (v.), vsfx, m.
Few, oXiyo, comp. fxtiov, sup.
oXiyioTo : Travpo
Field, aypo
182
VOCABULARy.
Fierce, aypio
Fight (v.), jwax, m. fut. and
aor. with connecting vowel e
Find, find out, evp («) (ewpio-fc)
fut. pass., evpe9rj(T, 2nd aor.
act.
Fine, icaXo
Finger, daKTvXo
Finish (v.), reXevTa; rekf, perf.
pass. rereXecr
Fire, Trvp, n,
Fii-e, set on, sfi-TrprjQ
First, TrpujTO
Fish (n.), ix9v
Fisherman, aXiev (F)
Fit, seem, coke, Sok for fat. and
ist aor.
Five, Trevre
Fix, TTTJY
Flatterer, koXclr
Flee, flee from, cpvy (ev), fat. m.
has 2nd perf.
FHght, (pvya, f.
Flower, avOeg, n.
Flute, avXa, f.
Fly (v.), Trer, m. fut. TrtTrja
(ofiai), perf. TTtTrrT/fca, aor.
mid. ETTTa-
Follow, £7r, m. 2nd aor. ccttt ;
augment u. dat.
FoUow with, (rvv-ETT
Folly, fiojpia, f.
Fond of war, (pXXo-TroXsfio
Fond of danger, <pXXo-Kivdvvo
Fond of horses, (pXX-iTnro
Foolish, a-vor]-TO, fiaraio
Foot, TTod, N.S. TToug
Footstep, txvec, n.
For (towards) prep., eiq, ace.
For (in behalf or in defence of)
prep., vTTtp, TTspi, gen.
For (on account of) prep., dia,
ace.
For death, fTrt 9avdT(^
For (conj.), yap ; never first in
a sentence.
Force (power), ^vfiafxi, f.
Foreign soldier (mercenary).
Formerly, TrpoaOev
Fortification, epyj-iar
Fortified, oxvpo
Fountain, Kprjva, f.
Four, Ttrrap (declinable)
Four thousand, rerpa-Kiff-xi^i-o
Fox, aXcj-SK, f. (7/ in N. S.)
Free (v.), air-aXXay (era-), gen.
Free (adj.), tXevOepo
Friend, (plXo
Frighten, (poj3e
From, aTTo, sk, Tcapa, gen.
Frontlet, 7rpo-/x£r-w7riCto, n.
Fruit, KapTTO
Fugitive, ^pdirtTa
Full, fiearo, TrXrjpeg, gen.
Fully (completely), ev-reXcog
Furnish (afford), Trdp-ex
Furnish (supply), Kard-tyKiva^
(0
G.
Gain possession of, /era, m.
Garden, ktjtto
Gardener, kjjttsv (F)
Garment, i^iario, n.
Garrison, (pvXdica, f.
Gate, TTvXa, f.
Gather, rrvX-Xsy
Gather in (harvest), (rvy-KOfiie
General (n.), arpdrrjyo
Get possession of, kto, m.
Get- wood, %vXiC (Z,), m.
Get-away, dpa (oi-^pa-cr/c)
Gift, dojpo, n.
Gild (v.), xP^^o
Girdle, Zwva, f.
Girl, Kopa (nom. in 77)
Give, ^0 (verb in /it, vide Ap-
pendix) ; short in pass. aor.
Give-up, irdpd-So, airo-Co
Give-a-signal, arifxav {aiv)
Glad, be dd (t)S), m. aor.
i
i
VOCABULARY.
183
Gladly, r)h(0Q
Go, I (a verb in fxi, vide Ap-
pendix)
Go-away, utt-i, air-eXO (only in
2nd aor.)
Go back, arro-vocTTe
Go -forward, Trpo-i
Go-before, irpo-epx, m.
Go-up, dvd-jSa (/3aiv)
Go-ofF, oix, m.
Go (retire), x'^P^
Goat, aiy
Goblet, £K-7r(t}-fiaT
God, eeo
Goddess, Ota
Going, be (to do anything), fxeX
(X\), followed by infin., ge-
nerally the future
Gold, xpi^co
Golden, X|o{l(r£o
Good, aydOo
Good-fortune, ev-daifwvia, f.
Good-disposition, ev-cpv'ia, f.
Goods, xRVI^f^T (pl^O
Government, apxoL, f.
Gratify, x^P^^ (^)» ^^' ^^^'
Great (size), fxtyaXo, fieya, vide
Appendix
Great (much), ttoXXo, ttoXv,
vide Appendix
Greater (size), fiei'Cov
Greatly (adv.), fieya (with " in-
jure," " benefit)," icrxvpiog
Grecian, Greek, (adj.), "EXX;^-
VIKO
Grecian, Greek (n.) 'EWrjv
Greece, 'EXXa^, f.
Greek, in (adv.), 'EWrjvKTri
Ground, ya, f.
Guard (v.), (pvXaK (o-c)
Guard, be on one's, (piiXaK (cc),
m.
Guard (n.), (pvXaK
Guide (v.), r)ye,m.
Guide (n.), ayojyev (F), rjye-
fiov
Guilt, airtafjLar
H.
Half, )]ni(rv (M. & N.), r]jiL<THa
(F.) ; an adj. followed by the
genitive of the noun with which
it agrees in gender
Hand, %fi|0, f.
Hand, right, ^t^ta (x£tp under-
stood)
Happen, tvx (ruy^ai^), fol-
lowed by participle
Happy, evdaiixov (in comp. and
sup. to- is inserted)
Harangue (v.), ayopev
Harbour (n.), XXjxev
Hare, Xayw
Harvest, Kap-rro
Hasten, (nrevd
Hastily, (nrovdaKjjQ
Hated, be, arr-txQ (civ), passive
Haughty, VTnpr]<pdvo
Have, ex, fut. iC, 2nd aor. tax
1st aor. pass. ttrx^Or}
He, she, &c., avro, tKtivo, vide
page 33
Head, Ke<l)dXay f.
Heal, UKE, f^-a/ce, m. perf.
Hear, hear from, aKo{ov), fut.
aKOvcr(onai), perf. uKTj-Koa ;
<T inserted in perf. stnd aor.
pass. gen.
Heavy armed man, oTrXlra
Height, ui/zj/Xo, n.
Hellespont, 'EXXrjcnrovTO
Hellespontiac, 'EXXTjairovriaKo
Helmet, KpdvtQ, n.
Hence, evrevQev
Hera (Jimo), 'Rpa
Herald, KrjpvK
Here, tvQa, evQaci
Hidden, KpvirTO
Hide, Kpv(p (ttt)
High, fiaKpo
High bank, ox^a, f.
Higher (adv.), avojrtpb)
Hill, Xo^o
Himself, &€., eavTo
184
VOCABULARY.
Hinder, icmXv
Hire, let for hire, fiiffOo
Hire, take on, fii<r9o, vn.
His, hers, &c., genitive of avTo
or avra
Historian, <7vyy patpev (F)
Hit (a mark), rvx (T^wyx^^)' S^^*
Hit (strike), jSaX (\X)
Hither, tvOads
Hold of, lay or take, Xa(5, m.
Home, at, oikoi
Honest, ayaOo, XRV^^'^'O
Honour (n.), rlfxa, f.
Honour (v.), rlfxa
Honourable, KaXo, sup. koWkxto
Honourably, KaXuJg
Hope for, hope, eX-rrid (Z)
Horn, KepcLT, n,, N.S. Kspag
Horse, ltttto
Horseman, iTr-mv (F)
Horses, fond of, (plX-nnro
House, oiKLu, f.
Household, oiko
How, oTTujg
Hundred, eKarov
Hunger, XT/xo
Hunt, Orjpa, fut. sometimes
mid. ; Gripev
Huntsman, OrjpevTa
Hurry, be in a (v.), (rirepx, m.
Husbandman, yeojpyo
Hystaspes, 'IVrao-Tra
I.
Idle, (ipyo, pd-9vfio
If, 61 (with indie, and opt.) eav
(with subj.)
If, as, <jjg
111, be, voae
Image, slkov, f.
Imitate, 'CijXo
Immediately, evOvg
Implant in, (pv-ev, dat.
Imprison, de
Impudent, av-aicsg
In, ev, dat.
Incur danger, KivSvvev
Independence, avro-voji'ia, f.
Induce, t%-ay
Industrious, (plX-epyo, (nrovdaio
Industry, airov^aiorriT, <ptXep'
yia, f.
Inflict, ev-TSv (reiv)
Inimical, cx^po
Injure, /3Xa/3 (ttt), adlKs
Innumerable, av-dpWfirjTO (c.)
Inquire, ttvO (nvvOav), m.
Instil, 5/<-j3aX (XX), has 2nd aor.
dat.
Insult, vf3pid (0
Intermission, without (adv. ),
a-dLa-Xmr-TOjg
Interpreter, kpfirivev (F)
Interview, have an, Gvy-ytv,
m. dat.
Into, Eig, ace.
Introduce, ua-ay
Ionia, Ibivia, f.
Iron (adj.), atSripeo
Island, vTjcro, f.
Islander, vqcriMra
J.
Join, join with, trvv-a^ (""r),
dat.
Judge (n.) (not legal), KpXra
Judge (legal), riyefxov tov ciku-
(TTTjpiOV
Judge (v.), KpXv (Kplv)
Juryman, cXKacrra
Just (adv.), i]d)j
Just (adj.), SiKaio
Justice, CiKaLOffvva
Justly, SiKaiojg
K.
Keep (support), rpt^
Keep (detain), Kur-ex
KiU, KTSv (eLv), aTTO-KTiv, 2nd
aor. act. e-KTav, aor. pass.
t-KTa-Qt]
Kind, tv-voo
Kindness, tv-voia, f.
VOCABULARY.
185
King, fSaaiXsv ( F)
Kingly, (iaaXXeio
Knife, jxaxaipa, f.
Know, oUa, 2nd perf. used as
imperf., derived from £i^,'see;'
oWa, olaOa, oWe ; L(r[iev^ tare,
ladai: ySei, past perf. used
as past imperf. ySeiv or ydrj,
ydiig and yCuaQa or r^drjcrOa,
ydu or yCr] ; ydei/xev, ydeiTe,
ydeffav ; fut. eia{ofxai) ; infi-
nitive ei^evai ; participle £i^or
(M. & N.) tidvia (F) (to be
used in no other tenses in
these exercises)
Know (become acquainted with),
yvu) (yi-yvoj-CFK), fut. yvui-
(T(o/iai), aor. pass. eyvoJcrO))
Knowledge, f.7rL-aT7]-fxa, f.
L.
Labour (n.), ttovo
Labour (v.), irove
Lacedaemon, AaKsdaifiov, f.
Lacedaemonian, AdKeSaifj-ovto
Laconia, AuKOJviKa, f.
Lady, SecrTvoiva (a in nom. and
ace. sing.)
Lamp, \afi7rad, f.
Land, ya, i.
Language, yXoxrca, f.
Large, /xeyaXo, fieya, comp.
fiei^ov, sup. fieyi(7T0
Laugh (v.), ytXa (a in fut. and
1st aor.)
Laughter, ys\o>T
Laurium, Aavpeio, n.
Law, vo[j.o
Law-giver, voixo-Qtra
Lay waste, tprjixo
Lay-hold-of, Xa/3, m. ace.
Lead (v.), ay, 2nd aor. rjyay
Lead-back, air-ay
Lead-out, e?-ay
Leaf, (pvWo, n.
Learn, ^dO(e) (fiav6av)y fut.
Hd9ri(T{ofiai) ; has 2nd aor.
Learn (hear, receive informa-
tion), TTvO {7rvv9av), m. has
2nd aor.
Leave, Xitt (Xenr), has 2n.d
aor.
Leave-behind, Kara-XiTT, vtto-
XlTT
Leave off (cease), XTjy ; followed
by pai-ticiple
Left (adj.), ev-wvvfio (Uterally,
well named)
Leg, (TKeXeg, n.
Leisure (n.), (JxoXa, f.
Leisure, be at, axoXad (?)
Lemnos, Ai)jxvo, f.
Leonidas, AtojvX^a
Lest, HI)
Lest (in order that not), iva
M
Let for hire, fxitrOo
Letter, «7ri-crroXa, f.
Liberty, eXevOspia^f.
Lie, tell a, xj^evo, m.
Life, j3io
Limit (v.), opid (?)
Lion, XeovT
Live (v.), 'Ca
Load (n.), (poprio, n.
Lofty, v%pr}Xo
Long, fiaKpo
Long (of time), ttoXu
Long-ago, irdXaL
Long before, ttoXvv xpovov irpiv
■n
Longer, no, ovkstl
Loquacious person, adoXeaxa
Loosen, Xv
Lose, a7ro-(3aX (Uterally, throw
away)
Loss, be at a, a-Trope
Lot, gain by, Xax (Xayxav)
Lot, assign by, KXrjpo
Love (v.), ^IXe
Luxury, x^i^*^? f.
Lycian, Avkio
Lydia, Avha, f.
Lysander, AvaavOpo
2
186
VOCABULARY.
M.
Machine, ii-qxava, f.
Maintain, rptcp
Maintenance, Tpo(pa, f.
Make evident, C)]\o
Make-terms with, Kard-Xv Ttpog
Man (human being), avQpojTco
(c.)
Man (adult male) ,avsp, vide p , 9 6
Man, old, yepovr
Man, young, vedvia
Many, ttoXXo, ttoXv, vide Ap-
pendix
Many, so, roaovro
March (v.), crT-pareu, m.
March (of an army), iropiv, m.,
aor. e-TTopev-Ori
March (v.), eXa (eXavv)
March (n.), rroptia, f.
Mark (target), okotto
Market-place, ayopa, f.
Master (of a slave), deaTrora
Master (of a scholar), dlcaaKoXo
Meadow, Xeifiojv
Mean (v.), OeX
Meat (food), clro
Mede, MtjCio
Meet (fall in with), sv-tvx,
avv-Tvx (rvyx^v)
Meet (join), avfi-iiiy
Megarian, Mtyapiv (F)
Menon, Isltviiiv
Merchandize, wvio, n. plu.
Merchant, e/u-Tropo
Messenger, ayytXo
Messmate, (Tvv-rpdTreZo
Mid, middle, midst, (adj.) /li£(to,
used as a neut. noun
Middle (of the body) (n.),
OfKpdXo
Miletus, yUXr]ro, f.
Miletus, a person of, MiXrjcno
Mingle with, /iiy (fiiypv), dat.
Moderation, with, fxtrpiojQ
Molossian, MoXoo-ffo
Money, apyvpic, n., xpjjjuar,
n. plu.
Month, firjv
Moi-e, (adj. comp. of many)
irXiiov
More (adv.), fidXXov
Most (adj., sup. of many),
TrXeicrro
Most (adv.), fiaX-KTTa
Mother, nrjrtp, vide p. 96
Mount (v.), dvd-l3a {(3aiv)
Mountain, opeg, n.
Move, kTvs
Much (adj.), TToXXo (vide many)
Much (adv.), jxdXa
Murder (v.), <povtv
My, ifio
Myself, ifiavTO
Mysian, Mwco
N.
Narrow, otevo
Nation, tQvig, n.
Nautical, vuvtiko
Naxos, Na^o, f.
Near (prep.), eyyvg, gen.
Near (adv.), TrXrjcnov
Necessary, avayKaio
Needle, pdfid, f.
Neither — nor, ovrt — ovre
Never, qvitote
New, Kaivo
Next (prep.), rrdpa, dat.
Next (following), (adj.) vartpaio
Night, vvKT, f.
Nightingale, arj^ov (c), liter-
ally, songster
No, no one, ovhv (M. & N.)
N. S. M. ovceig. ovdsfiia (F)
No longer, ovksti
Noblest, ap-KTTO
Nobly, yevvaiiog
Noise, Qopvfio
Noon, south, /Li£<T-7?/ii/3pia, f.
Nor, ovTt
North (literally, a bear), apKTo
Not, ov, before vowels ovk ; in
many dependent sentences and
in prohibitions, firi
VOCABULARY.
187
Nothing, ov^tv
Notice (v.), yvM (yi-yvw-cr/c)
Notice, escape, XaO (XavOav)
Now-then, wv ^r]
Number of, to the, tiq, ace.
O.
O (interjection), w
Oar, eperixo, n.
Oath, opKO
Obey, irXQ {ttuQ), m. dat.
Oblige, x«p'^ (^)> D^« dat.
Obliquely, tiq irXdyiov
Observe, <TKoire
Obtain, rvx (rwy%av)
Occupy beforehand, Trpo^Kara-
XdfS
Offer (v.), eTT-ayyeX, (XX) m.
Often, oftentimes, TroXXa-Kig
(kiq means * times ').
Oh, w
Old-man, ytpovT
Older, Trptd^vTspo
Oldest, irpecrfSvTaTo
Oligarchy, oXXy-apxia, f.
On, tv, STTL, dat.
On account of, dia, ace.
Once, TTOTS
One, h, (M. & N.) (N. S. M.
e'lg), fiia (F.)
One, some (a certain one), riv
One another, aXXr]Xo (plu.)
One of an opposite faction,
avTi-(Tra-(n(x)Ta
Open (v.), av-oiy
Opportunity, Kaipo
Opposite, opposed (prep.),
Kara, ace.
Oppress, Tried (?)
Or, r/
Oracle, fiavreio, n.
Orator, pijrop
Orchomenus, Opxonevo
Order (v.), KiXiv (for pass.) ;
Trap-ayyfX (XX), dat.
Order by a herald, KtjpvK (cty)
Order that, in, iva, ottujq
Organize, Kocrfie
Ornament (n.), icofffio
Orontes, Opovra
Other, aXXo, vide p. 33
Our, rfHf.Tf.po
Out of, f^, £K, gen.
Outside, t^u), gen.
Over (above), tin, dat.
Overtake, Kdra-XajS
Own (adj.), expressed by the ge-
nitive of the reflexive pronouns,
which are composed of the
personal pronouns and avro
Owner, icvpio
Ox, /3oF, N. (3ovg, G. (3ooq ;
vide Appendix
P.
Pack up, pack up baggage,
(TKfvaS ('C),m.', (Tv-(TKfvad,m.
Palace, jSdaiXeio, n. plu.
Palm-tree, ^oivik
Parasang, (3*24 miles) irapa-
aayy, f.
Pardon (v.), (ruy-yvoj (yi-yvw-
(Tk), dat.
Park, irdpadfiffo
Paros, Ilapo, f.
Partridge, rrepdiK^ f.
Party, either, (Kdrtpo, plu.
Parysatis, IlapvcrariO
Pasion, Ilacnojv
Pass (n.), 7rdp-o8o, f.
Pass over, dia-(Ba (fSaiv), perf.
(Se-jSrj-Ka
Pass by, irdp-fpx, m.
Pausanias, Tlavaavia
Pay (n.), iiiaQo
Peace, eiprjva, f.
Peacock, raw
Pebble, \prj(j)o
Peloponnesus, HeXo7rov-vr}(TO,(.
Pelt, ftdX (XX)
People, Srjjxo
Perceive, aitrQ (aiaOap), m.
(followed by participle) gen.
Perfectly, rcXcwc
188
VOCABULARY.
Perhaps, lacog
Perish, oX, m.
Permit, fa
Persian (n.), Uepaa
Persian (adj.), UepcriKo
Persuade, nXO (TreiO)
Phalanx, (paXayy, f.
Phalynus, ^aXvvo
Philip, ^iXlTTTTO
Philosopher, (pX\o.(To(po
Phrygia, ^pvyia, f.
Phrygian, (ppvy
Physician, idrpo
Pick up, av-aipe
Pierce, Trap {-rreip)
Piracy, Xyariia, f.
Pity (v.), oiKTip {up)
Place (n,), x<^pio, n.
Place (v.), KdQid {V)
Plain (n.), irtdio, n.
Plain (adj.), ca^ig
Plainly, aatp^q
Plan (n.), ISovXevfiar
Plant (v.), (pvTsv
Plant (n.), (pvro, n.
Pleasant, i^dv (M. & N.), r'ldeia
(F.), yXvKv (M. &N.), yXv-
KEia (F.), comp. yXvKiov
Pleased, be, ad {rjC), aor. vcrO)],
dat.
re, TTtoTo, n.
Plethrum (100 feet), TrXeOpo, n.
Plot (n.), e7n-(3ovXa, f.
Plot against, e7ri-(3ovXsv, m., dat.
Plunder (v.), oprrad (^), di-ap-
~ad
Polish (v.), EK-KciOap
Porch, (TToa, f. (retains a)
Possess (v.), KXrjpo, m.
Possession of, get, K7a,m.
Possible (adj.), dvvaTo
Possible, be, t^-ea
Post (v.), ray {aa)
Powerful, dvvaTO
Practise (v.), fieXera
Praise (v.), aive (e not length-
ened)
Pray to, Trpocr-evx, ^- dat.
Prefer, at|Of, m. followed by a vn,
with the gen. (vide Choose)
Preference to, in, avTi, gen.
Preparations, make counter,
avTi-irapa-UKivao (^)
Prepare, Trapa-aicevad (^)
Present, be, Trdp-ecr, dat.
Present (adj.), irap-ovT
Present (v.), Oojpe, m. ace. of
thing, dat. of person
Present (n.), ciopo, n.
Preserve (v.), aujo (^)
Press hard, iruc {I)
Pretext, irpo-cpa-cn
Prevent, KwiXv
Priest, uptv (F)
Prison, decrixojTripio, n.
Prisoner, dec^wTa
Prize, a9Xo, n.
Proclaim, Ki]pvK {err)
Procure, Kara-aKfvad (^)
Promise (v.), Xey ; vtt-ktx
(i(Txve) m. fut. VTTO^ffxrja,
perf. vTr-eaxV} aor. vir-eaX'
dat.
Property, XPVH-"^''' (plu.)
Prosperity, ev-e^ia, f.
Prosperous, be, ev -rrpay {an)
Provisions, STrirrjSeio (n. plu.)
Provisions, lay in, iTri-mrid (^),
m.
Punish (by legal sentence), ^Tjyiuo
Punish (chastise), KoXad {'0
Punishment, 'Crjyua, f.
Pupil, fjLdOrjTa
Purify, KaOdp {aip)
Pursue, duoK
Put on, tv-dv
Put to death, airo-acpdy (^ or
tt)
Pythagoras, HvOayopa
Q.
Queen, (idaXXiaaa, jSamXeia
Quick, Tdxv, comp. Oaaaov or
Taxiov
VOCABULARY.
189
Quickly, raxv, raxsoig
Quit, fcara-XiTT (Xeitt)
R.
Rank, ra^i, f.
Rather than, avTi, gen.
Ravenous, Xaifxapyo (c.)
Reach (v.), a0-TK {iKve), m. with
£tf and ace.
Ready, be (i. e. be inclined),
OtX, fut. ee\.r]<r
Ready (adj.), eToifjio
Rear-guard, OTricrQo-cpvXaK
Rear (bring up), rpecp, fut.
act. Opsxlj, perf. pass. rt-Opa^.
6K-Tpe(j)
Rebuild, av-oiKo-^ojxe
Receive, \a/3 {XajxjSav)
Receive, 8 ex, m.
Recognize, yvio (yi-yvw-cr/c)
Reconcile, tryv-aXXay {(T(t)
Reconnoitre, o-Kfir (-Trr), m.
Reduce to slavery, KaTa-dovXo
Refugee, exile, <ptvyovT
Register (v.), aTro-ypd<p
Reign (v.), (idaXXtv
Rejoice, x^p (x«*|o) f^^- X«'P»?<^
Related, be, Trpocr-TjK, dat.
Remain, fiev
Remember, ^va (jii-ixvrj-CK),
m.
Remind, ava-ixva, aor. av-efi-
vr](ya
Reply (v.), aiTO-KpXv {icplv), m.
Reply (u.), OTTO-Kpt-cn
Report (v.), ayyfX (XX), air-
ayyeX
Report (n.), Xoyo
Reproach (v.), oveidLd (^), dat.
of person, ace. of thing
Repulse (v.),a/tui/, m.
Require, aiTS, air-aire
Resolve (v.), (iovXsv, m.
Rest (v.), Rest themselves, irav,
m., ava-irav, m.
Rest (adj.), aXXo, vide p. 33
Restore (call from exile), Kar-ay
Restore (give back), airo-do
Retire, x^pe
Return (v.), airo-vo(TTS
Reverence (v.), aids, m. aor.
ydsadr)
Revolt (v.), afaffTriK
Reward (n.), yepdr, n.
Rhodian, 'Po^to
Rich, irXovaio
Riches, ttXovto (sing.)
Ride, eXa (tXavv), fut. cXaffw
Ride away, air-sXa
Ride by, irdp-iXa
Right (opposed to left), 8b^io
Right (hand), 8i%ia, f.
River, ttotcl^o
Road, b8o, f.
Robber, Xycrra
Robe, (TToXa, f.
Rope, (jirapTO, n.
Rose (n.), podo, n.
Rot off, have, airo-GaTr (cr7/7r),
has 2nd perf.
Rouse up, t^-tyep {up)
Rout (v.), TpiTC
Row (disturbance), Kpavya, f.
Rower, vTrrjpsTa
Royal, /SacriXfio
Rule (n,), KOLvov
Rule (v.), apx
Ruler, apxovT
Run, Tptx (only in pres. and
past imperf.)
Run, 9t
Run-away, aTro-dpa
Run forward, rrpo-Tpex
Running (n.), Spojxo
Rush forward, opua, m.
Sacred, iepo
Sacrifice (v.), 9v
Sacrifice (n.), Upo, n., 9vaia, f.
Safe, (TWO
Safely, a-(T<pdX(jjg, sup. a-atpd-
Xtarara
Safety, aojTripia, f.
190
VOCABULARY.
Sail (v.), TrXf (ttXev in all tenses
but pres. and past imperf.)
Sail away, airo-TrXe
Sail out, 6K-7rX£
Sail round, Trepi-TrXe
Sailor, vav-Ta
Sake of, for the, evsKa, gen.
Same, the, ro avro, vide p. 33
Same time, at the, aixa
Samian, 'Eafiio
Sapphire, (rainpeipo, f.
Sardis, HapSi, plu.
Satrap, a ar pair a
Save (v.), ao}d {I)
Save oneself, o-w^ (^), m.
Say, Xey
Scatter, cTKeBad, Sia-(TKedad
Scent (n.), ocrfia, f.
Scout, (TKOXO
Scythe, SpeTvavo, n.
Sea, OaXaTra, f.
Sea-fight (properly, ship-^ght)
vav-fiax-ia, f.
Sea-shore, uktu, f.
Season, (hpa, f.
See, 6pa, perf. kuipdKa (no aor.
nor fut.) ; i^(used in 2nd aor.
only) ; oir, m. used in fut.
Seed, (XTrepfiaT
Seek for, trjre
Seem, seem fit, doKS or doK
Seer, fiavTi
Sell, TTpa {jn-Trpa-OK)
Sell (offer for sale), ttwXc
Send, irefXTT, (used only in pres.
and past imperf. and fut.
The 2nd perf. ire-iroiKpa is
used only in late writers)
Send out, SK-TrefXTr
Send for, /xtra-Tre/XTr, m. ace.
Send secretly, vTro-TrtfiTr
Send with, avji-trenTV
Send, (TTtk (XX)
Send away, aTro-orcX
Sentence against, pass, kcltol-
■ilyr]<pLd CO, m. gen. of person,
ace. of thing
Servant, BtpaTzovT
Serve (v.), vTnjpsTe, dat.
Set sail, av-ay
Settler, additional, stt-oiko
Seuthes, "SevOa
Seven, e-n-ra (indeclinable)
Severe (literally, heavy) (3apv
(M. & N.), (Sapeia, (F.) ;
%aX£7ro
Severely, [3apsu)£
Sew, pd(p (ttt)
Shake (v.), o-ft
Share (v.), koivo, m.
Share (n.), iJ-speg, n.
Sharp, o^'j (M. &N.), o^sia (F.)
Sheep, 01, f., contracted into ol ;
N., v., and A. plu. olg
Shepherd, Troifxev
Shew, (pav {(paiv)
Shield, TreXra, f., acTTrid, f.
Shield-bearer, TreXraora
Ship, vaP or vav, f. (vide Ap-
pendix)
Shoot (with a bow), to^£v
Shop-keeper, KairriXo
Shout (v.), Kpay (2) (has 2nd
aor. and 2nd perf.)
Shouting (n.), Kpavya, f.
Show-off, fTTt-^et/f, m.
Shut, k\h
Shut out, aTTo-Kku
Shut up, Kard-Kku
Shut (a book), crvfi-Trrvy {aa)
Side of, by the, ivdpd, dat.
Side, on the other, irtpa, iripav
Sight (n.), QtdfiaT
Signal, give a, crjuav {aiv)
Signify, crijvav, or dia-ctjuav
Silent, be, anoira
Silver (n.), apyvpo, n.
Silver (adj.), apyvpeo
Sink (v.), Kard-dv, m.
Sister, a3e\<pa
Skilful, eixTTSLpo (gen.), iKdvo
Slaughter (v.), airo-acpay (^ or
rr)
Slave, dovKo
VOCABULARY.
191
Slavery, dovXfia, f.
Slay, (T(pay (^ or tt)
Sleep (v.), KaO-evd, fut. evdrja
Slinger, acpevdovrjra
Slow, (3pacv (M. & N.), /3pa^
Seia (F.) (comp. and sup.
both ways)
Slowly, fSpddeujg
Small, fxiKpio
Smoke, KaTrvo
Snail, KoxKo
Snow, Xiov, f.
So (adv.), ovT(jj, ovT(t)g
So many, toitovto
So that, wore
Socrates, "So^Kpareg
Soldier, (jrpdridJTa
Some (indefinite pron.) rij^, N.
S. Tig (M. & F.) ri (N.)
Some one, tlv
Sometimes, svlots
Son, vin
Soon (adv.), evOv, ev9vg
Sooner, TvpoaQtv
Sore (n.), eKKsg, n.
Sorrow, aXyeg, n.
South (literally, mid-day), fie-
(Tr/fjifSpia, f.
Sow (v.), (TTTsp {eip)
Spare (v.), 0i5 (st^), ni. gen.
Sparta, 2 Trap ra, f.
Speak, Xey
Speak with, ^la-Xey, m.
Spear, Xoyxa, f.
Speed, at the top of, ava Kpa-
Tog
Speedily, rdx^^t^Q
Spend (time), dia-TpX(3 (7/3)
Spin out (time), di-ay
Splendour, XafjnrpoTrjr
Spoil (v.), 00f|O (eip)
Spread, (nrtp (has 2nd aor.
pass.), dia-airfp
Spur (v.), vvy {aa)
Staff, pa^^o, f.
Stage (resting-place), CTa-Ofio
Standard, arifxtio, n.
State (community), TroXt, f.
Station, totto
Statue, avdpiavT
Stay, fjiev
Steal, fcXcTT (ttt), has both 1st
and 2nd aor. pass.
Steep, opOio
Steward, Tcifiia
StiU (adv.), sTi
Stolen, tcXtTTTO
Stone, XWo, m.
Stone, precious, XX9o, f.
Stop (v.) (put a stop to), TTav
Stop (cease moving), Kara-Xv
Storm, x^i^^v
Stranger, tevo
Strike, tvtt (ttt) ; Trai ; (with
any thing thrown), (3aX (XX)
Strike with astonishment, 6k-
7rX//y ((X(r)
Strip (v.), t//IXo, ace. and gen.
Strong (fortified), icrxvpo
Strongest, best, Kpar-iaro
Sudden, on a, i^ a-irpocT-doKr]-
TOV
Sufficient, apKovvr
Suggest, vTT-ay, m.
Suitable, iKavo
Summon, fcaXe, £ retained ; avX-
Xcy
Sun, 77X10
Supper, dopTTO, n.
Supperless, a-Senrvo
Surmount, dia-Trepa
Surround, kvkXo
Survey (v.), Oewpe
Suspect, VTr-OTTTEV, VTTO-VOS.
Swear, ojxvv
Sweet, i]Cv (M. &N.), -qhta (F.)
Swift, doo, To-x^
Sword, gi0o
T.
Table, rpaTre^a, f.
Tactics, ra^t, f. plu.
Take, XdjS {Xajx^av ; Long
Form, XjjjS)
192
VOCABULARY.
Take place, happen, ytv (ytyi^),
m.
Take out, i^-aipt
Talk (v.), XaXf
Taochian, Tao%o
Tardiness, l3pdSvTT]T
Tarsi, Tap(To, plu.
Taste (v.), ytv, m. gen. ; a in-
serted in perf.
Tax-gatherer, TE\o)va
Teach, Sax (^r ^i^«x)> {SXdaaK)
perf. act. dedcSaxa ; iraiStv,
with two accusatives.
Teacher, dldaffKoXo
Tegea, Teyea, f.
Tegeans, Teytara
TeU, \ey
Tell-beforehand, 7rpo-\ey
Temple, vao (Attic, vsu)), iepo, n.
Ten, SsKa, indeclinable
Ten thousand, [xvpLo (adj.)
Tent, (TKriva, f.
Terms, make, KUTa-Xv
Than, r/
That (conj.), on — when the de-
pendent sentence is the object
of the principal verb
That (conj.), fjirj — when the
principal verb implies fear,
soUcitude. or uncertainty
That (pron.), e/ceivo (neut. sing,
nom. and ace. have no suffix)
The, TO (M. &N.), ra (F.)
Thebes, e»7/3a, f. (plu.)
Then-indeed, ron dij
Then, evOadr]
There, tKti, ev9a
Therefore, ovv (cannot stand
first)
Thessaly, OsTraXia, f.
Thick (close), ttvkvo
Thief, KXsTTTa
Thigh, fiTjpo
Think, vofiid (?)
Thirsty, Si-^atvT (the superlative
is to be expressed by the ad-
verb naXiGTo)
This, TovTo (see p. 33), ro-^f {to
is the article)
Thorn, uKavOa, f. (a retained in
nom. and ace. sing.)
Thou, (TV (see page 1)
Thousand; xlXto (plu. adj.)
Thracian, Qpaic
Three, rpt
Three thousand, rpia-xlXio
(adj.) ^
Throat, Xapvyy
Throne, Opovo
Through, Sia, gen.
Through (on account of), dia,
ace.
Throw, j8aX (XX), pnr (ttt)
Throw away, airo^aX
Throw into (e. g. prison), f/i-
/3aX (perf. j3e-[3\r)-Ka)
Throw into confusion, rapax
((7(7) ^
Thus, OVTOJ, OVTb}Q
Thyself, aavTO
Tigres (river), TiypTjr
TiU (prep.), /itxpt, gen.
Timber, ^yXo, n. plu.
Time, xpo^o
Time of, in the, etti, gen.
Time (season), ojpa, f.
Time, in (opportunely), tv icatpy
Tired, be, air-ayoptv
Tissaphernes, TiaaatpipvtQ
To (with motion), irpog, C7rt, hq,
with ace.
To be (infinitive), eivai
To the number of, hq, ace.
Together, afia, dat.
To-morrow, avpiov, adv.
Tongue, yXojacra, f.
Too, Ts (enclitic)
Too-severely, <j^oSpa
Top, aKjOO, n.
Towards, irpoq, ace.
Towar, Trvpyo
Town, TToXi, f.
Townspeople, TroXIra
Track, ixv^Q* n.
VOCABULARY.
193
Traitor, irpo^ora
Transact, Trpay {(T(t)
Traveller, oSlra
Treachery, irpoSoaia, f.
Treasure, 9ri(Tavpo
Tree, SevdpOj n.
Trial, aycjv
Troops, dvvafii, f. sing.
Trouble (n.), ai/ia, f.
Truce, aTrovda, f. plu.
Truce, make or conclude a,
airev^, m. aor. i.-aTTiiaa
True, aXrjOeg
Truly, akr]dix)Q
Trumpet, caXiriyy, f.
Trumpeter, craXTrtyKra
Trust (confide in), iriaTtv,
dat.
Turn, rptTT, perf. act. Ttrpocpa
or TiTpa^a
Turn away, aTro-rpeir
Turn over, tiri-TptTr
Turn, orpf^ (aor. pass, with
intransitive signification)
Twist round, arpt^
Two, Svo
Two himdred, diuKocrio (adj.)
Tyrant, rvpavvo
U.
Under, utto, dat.
Unfaithfulness, a-iriaTia, f.
Unfasten, xaXa
Unfortunate, ^vcr-rux-tt
Unjust, a-SlKO
Unjustly, act, a-SXKe
Unless, ft jut;, iav [xr]
Unprepared, a-Trdpa-CKtvaoTO
Unpunished, a-Z,i]iiio
Until (prep. ),/i£xpt (withnoun),
(conj.) fi^xpi avy kujg av (with
subj. and opt.)
Unwilling, ukovt
Up (prep.), dva, ace.
Up to, Trpog, ace.
Upon, £7rt, dat., tig, ace.
Upper chamber, avioyttn, n.
Use, make use of, xp"? "3. dat.
Useful, xp^(^^f^o
Valour, apera, f.
Valuable, a^io
Very (adv.), crcpodpa, fiaXa
Very (adj.), avro
Vessel, ttXoio, n.
Vessel, copper, x«XKw/Ltar
Victim, <T(pdyto, n.
Village, KMfxa, f.
Villain, KCLKovpyo
Villainy, KuKovpyia, f.
Vine, tt/XTTfXo, f.
Vineyard, afiirtXiov
Violate, Xw
Violent, x«Xf7ro
Virgin, -KapQtvo
Virtue, apera, f.
Voice, (pMva, f.
Voracious, Xaiixapyo
Vow (v.), ewx, m.
W.
Wage war, go to war, no-
Xsfxe
Waggon, dfia^a, f.
Wait, fxev
Wait for, irtpi-iitv, ace.
Walk (v.), j8a5i5 (?)
Want, be in, (nrdvid {Z)
War (n.), iroXefio
War (adj.), woXtfiiKo
War, make or wage, iroXtfie
War-like, TroXf/uiKO
Wai-d-off, rt/xiJv (vv)
Wares, (ovlo, n. plu.
Watch (v.), (pvXdK {<t<t)
Way, odo, f.
We, rfp.f.iQ, vide p. 1.
Weakness, a-aOtv-aa, f.
Weary (adj.), KcifidTripo
Weigh (raise — an anchor), dva
aira
Weep, SaKpv
WeU (adv.), uj
194
VOCAEULARY.
Well-girt, iv-Z,(jjvo
Wet (v.), liptx
What, 6 (n.) ; in questions, n ; in
dependent interrogatory sen-
tences, 6,Tl
When {at the time when), orf
When {after the time when),
67rfi, ETreidrj
When, e-rreidav, (with subj.)
Whence, evOev
Whenevei*, tTretdav, oTrorav
Where, ev9a
Where (in dependent interro-
gatory sentences), ottov
Whether — or, Trortpov — rj
Whether (if), n
Which, 6 (M. & N.), a (F.),
(vide p. 33)
While, Whilst, tcog, kxts ; av is
added when the subjunctive
is used.
Whither ? ttoI ; in dependent
sentences, ottoi
Who, 6 (M. & N.) a (F.) (vide
p. 33)
Who ? Tiv
Whole, All, TravT (M. & N.),
Traca (F.)
Wife, yvvaiK, N. S. yvvr]
Wild, aypLO
Wild-beast, Orjpio, n.
Willing (adj.), Uovt (M. & N.),
EKovcra (F.)
WilHng, be, eOeX
Win (a battle), vIku
Wind, avefio
Wine, oivo
Wing (of an army), Ktpar, n.
Winter-quarters, %€t/ia^fo, n.
plu.
Wisdom, (TO(pia, f.
Wise, cFOipo
Wish (n.), (SovXrjfxoT
Wish (v.), OeX, (3ov\, m. fut.
(3ov\r](x, aor. efSovXijOri
With, With the aid of, aw, dat.
With (in the phrase ' with flutes, ' )
fxsra, gen.
Within, tKTit), gen.
Without, avtv, gen.
Witness (n.), fxaprvp
Wolf, XvKO
Woman, yvvaiK, N. S. yvvr}',
Voc. yvvai
Woman's (adj.), yyyaiKfto
Wonder (v.), QavixuT (?), fut.
mid.
Wonder at, Qaviiar, gen.
Wonderful, Qavp,aaTO
Wood {not timber), vXa, f.
Wood, get (v.), 'ivXi5 (?), m.
Wooden, ^vXlvo
Woodman, yXo-rofio
Word, tTTSQ, n.
Work (n.), epyo, n.
Work (v.), epyad (^), m.
Workman, epyara
Worthy, a^io
Worthy to be general (adj.),
a^io-arparriyo
Wound (v.), Tpb) {Tl-Tpixi-GK)
Wound (n.), rpavfJiaT
Wreath (n.), art^dvo
Write, ypa(p
Wrong (v.), a-SlKS
X.
Xenias, Stvia
Xenophon, Ssvocjxijvt
Ye, v/xeLQ (vide p. 1)
Yet, cTt, evOvg
Young, veo
Young man, Youth, vedvia
INDEX OF THE RULES OF SYNTAX.
n after the number of the page denotes that the Rule is
in a Note.
PAGE
Absolute Case . . . . . . . , . . . . 82
Aorist, when used . , . . . . . . . . . . 40
Aorist sometimes translated by English Present Perfect 41 n.
Aorist Subjunctive, when used instead of Imperative . . 63
Aorist Imperative, when used . . . . . . . . 72
Aorist Infinitive, when used . , . . . . . . 77
Dative used to denote the Instrument . . . . . . 26 n.
Duration of Time, how expressed . . . . . . 34 n.
Future Optative, when used . . . . . . . . 69
Future Perfect Passive, its meaning . . . . . . 115
Hypothetical Sentences, how expressed in Greek 65, 66 n.
Imperative Perfect Passive, its meaning . . . . 131
Indicative, when used . . . . . . . . . . 19
Infinitive, how employed as a Noun . . . . . . 74
Infinitive Imperfect, when used . . . . . . . . 77
Limiting "Words put in the Accusative . . . . . . 56
Mj;, when used instead of ort . . . . . . . . 66 n.
Middle Verbs, their Significations . . . . . . 89
Neuter Plural Nominatives with Singular Verbs . . 5 n.
Optative Tenses, when used . . . . . . . . 65
Participles, use of . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Participle Future, use of . . . . . . . . . . 83
Past Imperfect, when used . . . . . . . . 35
Perfect, Present, when used . . . . . . . . 51
96
INDEX OF THE RULES OF SYNTAX.
Present Imperfect Subjunctive, when used
Present Imperative, when used . .
Position of the Verb tcr
Pronouns, Personal, their Nominatives rarely used
Relative Words, how used with the Subjunctive
Relative Clauses often expressed by Participles . .
Subjunctive and Optative Tenses, when used . .
Subjunctive Tenses, when used , .
PAGE
61
71
2n.
2n.
61 n.
80
59
60
THE END.
Priatcdby J.&. H.Cox, Brothers (late Cox & Sons),
74 & 75, Great Queen Street, Lincoln's-Inn Fields.
•■•••...• >..•■•-•.<» ^."W^ -
y^,..f\y -4..
s^X-^X^X^X^X^X^X^X^X^X-^X^X^X-^iX'
C¥X^X^X¥X^X¥X^X¥X¥X^X¥v^v^v^>:r«
si"X¥XWX¥XWX^X^X¥X¥X¥XWX¥X'^XWx^''
(^x^x^xwx^x^x^x^x^x^'^^^v^x^^iV^y^
^X¥X¥X^X¥X^X^X^X^X^XWX¥V^V¥V^:
c^x-^x^x^xwx^x^x^x^x^x^x^x^x^x^
?X¥x;^xwxwx^x^x¥x^x¥X¥x^x^x^xW!;
c^x^x^x-^x^xwxwx^x^xWxWx^x^xw
(X^X^X¥X¥X^X^"X¥X¥X¥X-^X^X^XWX'^^
("•^X^X^X^X^X^X^XWXWX-^X^XWX^XWX^
<X^X¥X¥X¥X«^X¥X^X¥X¥XWX¥XWX^X-^")
C^X^X¥XWX¥X¥XWX¥X¥XWXWX¥X^X^X^
^x-^x-^x^x^x^x-^x^xwx^x^xwxWxWxW)
(^X^X¥X¥X¥X¥X¥X^X¥XWX^X^XWX¥X?
^X^"XWX^XWX¥X^X¥X^X^X¥X¥X^XWX^i
^^x^X¥xwx¥xWx^xWxWxWxWxWx¥xWx^
^x^xwx^xwx^x-^x^xWx^x^xwxWx^x^)
^¥X¥X¥X¥XWXWX¥X^X^X^XWX¥XWX¥X^
^x^x;^x¥X¥x^x¥X¥x^X!^x^x^xWx^xW)
<^X^X^X^X^X^X^X^X^<^X^X^X^X^X)
C^X¥X^X^"X¥X¥XWX^X¥X^XWX^X^X¥X^
^x^X'^x^x'^xWxWx^xWx^xWx^xwx^x^)
<^¥X¥X^XWX¥X^X^X^X^X^'X^X¥XWX^X^
^XWX¥XWxWxWX^XWXWX¥X^X^X¥X^X
<WX¥X^X¥XWX¥X¥X¥X^X^X^X¥X^XWX>
^X^X¥X^X^X^X¥X¥X¥X¥X^X¥X¥X^X¥)
<!^X¥X¥XWX^X^X^X¥X^XWX^XWX¥X^X^
^X¥XWX^XWxWxWX¥XWX¥X¥X¥X^X^
<^x^x}^x;^x^x^x^xi^x^x;^xj^xi^xi^x^x)
^fWx^xWxWx^xwxWx-^x^x^x^x
^X¥X¥X^X¥X¥X¥XWxWX¥XWX'^X^X¥XWx
<^X)^X^X^X^X^X^X^X^X^X^X»<^X^X^
^X^X^X¥X^X¥X¥X¥X^X¥X¥X)^X^X^X^:
<^X^X¥X¥X^X¥X¥XWX¥XWX¥X^X^X¥X^
^x^x^x^x^x^xwx^x^x^x-^x^xwxwx^
<^X^X^X¥X^X^X^X¥X^X^X^X^X^X^D<-
^X¥XWX^X¥X¥X^X¥X^X¥X)^X^X^X^X¥-
^X^X¥X¥XWXWX^X^X^X WX^XWX¥X^X^' j
C^<¥X^X^X^X^X^X^XWX¥X¥X^X'^X^X^
><^X¥X¥X¥X)^X¥X^
^XWX^D<^X^X^fX¥X^D<¥X^X^X^X¥X¥X^
M.^N.^<>!(X'*D<ii«(X>i'.x-.
SCHOOL BOOKS
DIOTlONARy OF GREEK AND KOMA^ AiNTlQUITlES. By
various Contributors. Edited by Dr. W. S>uth. Ilu'stiiated
By :»ANY HUNDRED ExGRANiNus ON WooD. 2nd edition^ revised
and tnlargeJ. 1 vol. 8vo., 42s. cloth lettered.
DICTIOXAKY OF GREEK AND ROMAN BIOGRAPHY AND
aiYTIlOLOGY. By various Contributors. Edited by Dr. W.
Smith. Illustrated bv engravings on Wood. 3 vols. 8vo. o/. los. (id.
Vob. I. and II., each"l/. Itl*. Vol. III., 21. 3s. Gd. cloth lettered.
NEW GREEK DELECTUS; Sentences for Translation from Greek
into English, aud from English into Greek, arranged in a sy.steniatic
Progre.ssion. (By Dr. Rapijlvel Kuhner.) Translated and Edited
from the German. ByDr. Aulen. 7'hiTdedition,recisvd. Tinio. i-s.
NEW LATIN DELECTUS: upon the same plan as the Greek. 15y
Dr. Aixex. Third edition, revised. 12mo. 4».
CONSTRUCTIVE GREEK EXERCISES, for teaching Greek from
the beginning by Writing. By Dr. Allen. Second edition, muck
improved. l2mo. 5«.
ECLOG.E CICERONIANiE; Selections from the Works of Cicero.
liy Dr. Ai.i f.n. l>mo. 2s, Grf.
CONSTRUCTIVE LATIN EXERCISES, for teaching the Elements
of the Language on a system of Analysis and Synthesis, with
copious Vocabularies. By John Robson, B.A. 12mo. 6s. d/. cloth.
LATIN AUTHORS, selected for the use of Schools; containing j>or-
tions of Pha-drus, Ovid's Metamorphoses, Virgil's ^'Eneiil. Ca•^ar,
and Tacitus. 12mo. 3*. M.
GREEK AUTHORS, selected for the use of Schools; containing
portions of Lucian's Dialogues, Anacreon, Homer's Iliad, Xeiu.ipiion's
Memorabilia, and Herodotus. r2mo. Zs. 6rf.
ANABASIS OF CYRUS, Book I., Ch. 1 to C. Literal and Inter-
linear Translation of the First Chapter, and a Lexicon t<^ the wliule,
in which the words are divided into their several Parts, an<i deriva-
tives are collected imder their respective Roots. By J. T. V. IL\ui)y,
B.A. 12mo. '6s. 6J.
LATIUM'S ENOTTSH LANGUAGE. Second edition. Sxo.los.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR. Third
ELEitENTAEY
edition. l2mo. 4«. 6J.
FIRST LESSONS IN
Ladies Schools. Fcap 8vo.
ENGLISH GRAJ^IM.Ui for
■ " for Commercial Schools.
for Classical Schools.
OUTLINES OF LCXJIC .U'PLIED TO GILYMM AR
AND ETYMOLOGY. 12mo. is. lid.
TAYLOR, WaLTO.N & MABERLY,
28, UPPEK cowep. street, & 27, ivy l,vne, paternostep. row.
•^ ^-^ • CXI
:'!^Xii^Xi^x^Xii^Xi^X!!^x^^^ wy w vws^^
It
'^i^''M^^ LIBRARY OF CONGRESS
003 036 142 8 #
"^